GE Selection and Application Guide for SB Control and ...

77
' GET-6169E . $electfon and Application Guide for sa:,,pontrol and Transfer Switches - ' \ ) ) - '

Transcript of GE Selection and Application Guide for SB Control and ...

GET-6169E

bull $electfon and Application Guide for sapontrol and Transfer Switches

-

) ) -

Control and Transfer Switches Mulii-siage-1ersaiile-reliable

The SBM Switch - rotary cam-operated compact -for middotpanel mounting only Two electrically separate and mechanically independent contacts per stage These small vershysatile switches mount close and wire easily on your switchboard Common types are warehouse stock

Instruction Book-GEH-2038

Renewal Parts-GEF-4167

The SB-1 Switch -rotary cam-operated slightly larger than the SBM switch and capable of

Instruction Book-GEH-908 more design flexibility Can be indeshyRenewal Parts-GEF-2357pendently mounted and housed Many

common types warehoused

====================================================================================================JI

The SB-9 Switch -a heavier-duty switch than the SB-1-for applications requiring unusually high

Instruction Book-GEH-908numbers of repetitive operations but otherwise similarmiddot in optional features Renewal Parts-GEF-3481

and design capability

The SB-10 Switch -in addition to the rotary operation like the SB-1 switchmiddot the SB-10 is capable

Instruction Book-GEH-908of opening and closing contacts with a

Renewal Parts-GEF-3482lateral push or pull of the handle

The SBE Switch -this switch may not only be manually

Instruction Book-GEK-99289operated locally but may also be electrically

Renewal Parts-GEF-ope~ated remotely

(8919388)

I

I

This publication provides descriptive technical selection and ordering information on control and transfer switches manufactured by General Electric Company

To aid selection and specification general arrangements and contact diagrams are included for the many models of the standard switches described on the opposite page Several standard circuits are illustrated for the common applications such as circuit breaker control and ammeter-voltmeter transfer Select the model which applies and order by model number only using the appropriate ordering guide If the standard switch is satisfactory except for some minor exception specify the exception along with the appropriate catalog number

If a standard model does not meet your application follow the ordering instructions given in this publication to specify the functions you need or order by similar to except (state the exception) Use one of the following forms to place your order

Form GED-3933-for SBM switches only Form GED-3934-for SB-1-9-10 switches

Part 1-Standard features Part 2-Optional features

For convenience copies of these forms have been included in this publication which can be reproduced in lieu of the forms

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern Pa 19355

Introduction

3

I

PAGE

TYPE SBM SWITCH FEATURES 5 -TYPE SB-1 SWITCH FEATURES 8

OPTIONAL FEATURES-_

SBE ELECTRIC OR HAND OPERATEDCAM ACTION AND LIMITATIONS

OVERLAPPING CONTACTS

REMOVABLE HANDLES

TEMPERATURE METER SWITCHES

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

TYPE SB-9 SWITCH FEATURES 9

TYPE SB-10 SWITCH FEATURES - middot10

SPECIAL FEATURES SB-1 SB-9 SB-10 middot11

TANDEM SWITCHES 14

PULL-TO-TURN middot 14

PAILADIUM CONTACTS 14

LOCK TYPE SWITCHES _14

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot16

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot ~ ~ 18

(SBM SB-1 SB-9) 20

(SB-1) middot- 22

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) 23

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR TANDEM SWITCHES 27

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR LOCKED SWITCHES 28

CONTACT DIAGRAMS_FOR SBM SWITCHES 29

CONTACT DIAGRAMS FOR SB-1 SWITCHES 43

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SBM SWITCHES 60

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SB-1-9-10 SWITCHES 63

FORM GED-3933 SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 69

FORM GED-3934 PART 1 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES STANDARD FEATURES 70

FORM GED-3934 PART 2 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES SPECIAL FEATURES 71

FIELD MODIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TYPE SBM CONTROL SWITCH 72

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SBM SWITCHES 74

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SB-1 AND SB-9 SWITCHES 75

I

4

I Construction Features

Escutcheons Two basic types of escutcheons are available the standard and the target The standard type shown on the left is a molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of the positions A target type escutcheon shown in the middle is normally furshynished on breaker control switches An aluminum front plate houses the target mechanism with a window in the center to show green for the trip posishytion red for the closed position and black for the pull-to-lock position The

a PISTOL GRIP OVAL

Handles Four types of molded black phenolic handles shaped for easy gripping are available with the SBM switch pistol grip oval knurled and lever Any of the standard handles except the lever may be adapted for removable handle keying A fixed handle may be easily removed for replacement by a screw in the front of the handle A white

KEYED

target has a slip action so that it will remain green when the handle returns to NORMAL from the TRIP position and red when it returns from the CLOSE position This shows the operator the last operation of the switch

On the right a modified standard is shown with keyways for use with a removable type handle

Aluminum circuit designation plates are available for all three types

4KNURLED LEVER

pointer furnished with the handles (except the lever) and mounted near the escutcheon give a clear identishyfication of the position that the handle is in For match and line up with SB-1 switches type SB-1 pistol grip oval knurled and round handles can be furshynished for use with SBM switches

Cams and Contacts The silver to silver contacts of the SBM switch are of double-break design as seen at left which reduces arcing and subsequent pitting of contacts Each contact is operated by a double surface cam one surface for closing the other surface for opening This construction provides opening and closing action not dependent on springs

Keyed Escutcheons and Removable Handles -The removable handle commonly used in synshychronizing switches can be made to be reshymoved in any one of the eight positions There are three keys set in front of the handle so that they fit the designated keyways in the escutcshyheon in a desired position The escutcheon can be keyed so that a handle is interchangeshyable or non-interchangeable with another switch If this is desired the catalogue number of the other switch and the position in which the handle is to be removed must be given The removable handle is not furnished with the switch but as a separate item

-Slip Cams The slip cam is basically used on breaker conshytrol switches The slip action enables a contact to remain closed or open after returning to the normal (12 oclock) position from either the CW or CCW positions

I

I

6

I

- Positioning Contacts of the SBM switch are positively positioned by a detent wheel mounted on a square shaft and acted upon by a springshyloaded roller arm If the shaft of the 45deg switch is not rotated more than one-half the distance between positions it will snap back to its prior position If rotated more than half the distance between positions it will snap to the next posishytion The 90deg switch has this same positive detent action when in position but the snapshyping action is not as prominent Up to eight positions are available with 45deg or 90deg between positions

-Terminal Connections Terminal connections are brought to the corners of each stage allowing screw connections to be made over a large angle This angular displacement of connection points allows the switches to be mounted on three-inch centers or less

Jumpers Jumpers are furnished assembled where required on all standard listed switches For special switches or unshylisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered-

-~ 1T)

Jumper Jumper 307V515P1 307V512P1 (Same Stage) (Adjacent

Stage)

Contacts Positions Handle End 3 2 1

1 X

o-t I-ltgt egt-11-ltgt X2

o-tl--0 X3 X

Break-Before-Make Contacts Contacts on SBM switches are normally non-overlapping (break-before-make) This sequence is illustrated above which shows that contact No 1 opens before contact No 2 closes

Another normal function is illustrated by contact No 3 which is shown closed in two adjacent positions When switching between these positions this contact will always remain closed

Spring Action Torsion springs return the switch handle to or towards the 12 oclock or No 3 position The travel of the handle is limited to 90deg to either side of posshyition 3 The switches may be furshynished with spring return both ways or only one way with maintaining action in the opposite direction You can also have spring return from posishytion No 1 (9 oclock) to position No 2 (10 oclock) andor spring return from position No 5 (3 oclock) to position No 4 (2 oclock) with maintained action in the other positions Torsion springs are housed in the rear half of the posishytioning chamber There is no need to modify the chamber to accommodate the springs

Add-A-Stage A one-half inch exentsion is provided on the rear of all switches with one to eight stages This extension enables a maximum of two adshyditional stages to be easily and economically coupled to the existing switch in the event more contacts are required Maximum number of stages including Add-A-Stage unit is 10 (20 contacts)

I I IContacts Handle End

i~IC~ cu tNrt) Oodj I xx xxxx X~inimiddot 2 XXX 3 X xx xxxx~1661 4 xx X

xx xx5 X xx~fl11bull 6X xx

Overlapping Contacts Overlapping contacts (make-before-break) contribute to the versatility of the SBM switch

Typical overlapping contacts are shown on model switch 10AA009 The asterisk () indishycates an intermediate (non-feel) position and shows the contacts overlapping In the 10AA009 when turning from the OFF position to reading position 1 (Phase 1) contact 2 doses at the intermediate position and before contact 1 which remained dosed through the intermediate position opens

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock mechanism is designed for spring-return switches When the handle is turned to the 9 oclock posishytion it can be pulled out and locked in that position When the handle is pushed in the handle spring returns to the normal position This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts but merely prevents the spring return of the handle

7

I Contacts numbered for easy identification

Circuit designation plate is marked for easy identification of switch functions

Good selection handles

Escutcheon plates of pershymanent-finish molded material are neat in appearance and uniform in size

Front aupport spaces body of switch ~ inch from rear of the pane allowing ample room for inaerting leads into the switch

Protective cover (not shown) completely covers all live parts meets NEMA 1 requireshyments for panel mounted switches

Type SB-1 Switch With Cover Removed

SB-1 Switch Provides Flexible Dependable Control for

Electrically-operated Equipment Type SB-1 switches are rotary camshyoperated devices for the control of electrically-operated circuit breakers small motors magnetic switches and similar devices and for the transfer of meters instruments and relays The Type SB-1 switch has molded cams assembled on a square shaft to prevent slipping Rotation of the shaft moves cams directly against contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact Contact action is not dependent on springs

Silver-To-Silver Contacts Silver-to-silver contacts operate with

a positive wiping action to provide lowshyresistance current flow Contacts can be removed independently of other switch parts Barriers between adjacenl conshytacts prevent arcing between circuits The switch complete with cover can be obtained with up to 16 stages two electrically separate contacts per stage and for mounting on panels from 1e to 2 thick The panel thickness should be specified when the switch is ordered if it is not the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to frac34t thick The SB-1 switch which has a standard insulating cover meets NEMA I requireshyments for panel mounting

Standard Parts Flexibility and low initial cost are the results of standardizing a basically -simple design Standard SB-1 switches are available for most applications For special applications switches can be built from standard parts The long~ wearing cams positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contacts and positive contact opening and closing action all contribute to a switch which is high in quality and will give you many years of dependable service

SB-1 is recognized under the component proshygram of Underwriters Laboratories Inc

I

8

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

Control and Transfer Switches Mulii-siage-1ersaiile-reliable

The SBM Switch - rotary cam-operated compact -for middotpanel mounting only Two electrically separate and mechanically independent contacts per stage These small vershysatile switches mount close and wire easily on your switchboard Common types are warehouse stock

Instruction Book-GEH-2038

Renewal Parts-GEF-4167

The SB-1 Switch -rotary cam-operated slightly larger than the SBM switch and capable of

Instruction Book-GEH-908 more design flexibility Can be indeshyRenewal Parts-GEF-2357pendently mounted and housed Many

common types warehoused

====================================================================================================JI

The SB-9 Switch -a heavier-duty switch than the SB-1-for applications requiring unusually high

Instruction Book-GEH-908numbers of repetitive operations but otherwise similarmiddot in optional features Renewal Parts-GEF-3481

and design capability

The SB-10 Switch -in addition to the rotary operation like the SB-1 switchmiddot the SB-10 is capable

Instruction Book-GEH-908of opening and closing contacts with a

Renewal Parts-GEF-3482lateral push or pull of the handle

The SBE Switch -this switch may not only be manually

Instruction Book-GEK-99289operated locally but may also be electrically

Renewal Parts-GEF-ope~ated remotely

(8919388)

I

I

This publication provides descriptive technical selection and ordering information on control and transfer switches manufactured by General Electric Company

To aid selection and specification general arrangements and contact diagrams are included for the many models of the standard switches described on the opposite page Several standard circuits are illustrated for the common applications such as circuit breaker control and ammeter-voltmeter transfer Select the model which applies and order by model number only using the appropriate ordering guide If the standard switch is satisfactory except for some minor exception specify the exception along with the appropriate catalog number

If a standard model does not meet your application follow the ordering instructions given in this publication to specify the functions you need or order by similar to except (state the exception) Use one of the following forms to place your order

Form GED-3933-for SBM switches only Form GED-3934-for SB-1-9-10 switches

Part 1-Standard features Part 2-Optional features

For convenience copies of these forms have been included in this publication which can be reproduced in lieu of the forms

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern Pa 19355

Introduction

3

I

PAGE

TYPE SBM SWITCH FEATURES 5 -TYPE SB-1 SWITCH FEATURES 8

OPTIONAL FEATURES-_

SBE ELECTRIC OR HAND OPERATEDCAM ACTION AND LIMITATIONS

OVERLAPPING CONTACTS

REMOVABLE HANDLES

TEMPERATURE METER SWITCHES

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

TYPE SB-9 SWITCH FEATURES 9

TYPE SB-10 SWITCH FEATURES - middot10

SPECIAL FEATURES SB-1 SB-9 SB-10 middot11

TANDEM SWITCHES 14

PULL-TO-TURN middot 14

PAILADIUM CONTACTS 14

LOCK TYPE SWITCHES _14

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot16

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot ~ ~ 18

(SBM SB-1 SB-9) 20

(SB-1) middot- 22

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) 23

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR TANDEM SWITCHES 27

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR LOCKED SWITCHES 28

CONTACT DIAGRAMS_FOR SBM SWITCHES 29

CONTACT DIAGRAMS FOR SB-1 SWITCHES 43

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SBM SWITCHES 60

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SB-1-9-10 SWITCHES 63

FORM GED-3933 SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 69

FORM GED-3934 PART 1 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES STANDARD FEATURES 70

FORM GED-3934 PART 2 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES SPECIAL FEATURES 71

FIELD MODIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TYPE SBM CONTROL SWITCH 72

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SBM SWITCHES 74

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SB-1 AND SB-9 SWITCHES 75

I

4

I Construction Features

Escutcheons Two basic types of escutcheons are available the standard and the target The standard type shown on the left is a molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of the positions A target type escutcheon shown in the middle is normally furshynished on breaker control switches An aluminum front plate houses the target mechanism with a window in the center to show green for the trip posishytion red for the closed position and black for the pull-to-lock position The

a PISTOL GRIP OVAL

Handles Four types of molded black phenolic handles shaped for easy gripping are available with the SBM switch pistol grip oval knurled and lever Any of the standard handles except the lever may be adapted for removable handle keying A fixed handle may be easily removed for replacement by a screw in the front of the handle A white

KEYED

target has a slip action so that it will remain green when the handle returns to NORMAL from the TRIP position and red when it returns from the CLOSE position This shows the operator the last operation of the switch

On the right a modified standard is shown with keyways for use with a removable type handle

Aluminum circuit designation plates are available for all three types

4KNURLED LEVER

pointer furnished with the handles (except the lever) and mounted near the escutcheon give a clear identishyfication of the position that the handle is in For match and line up with SB-1 switches type SB-1 pistol grip oval knurled and round handles can be furshynished for use with SBM switches

Cams and Contacts The silver to silver contacts of the SBM switch are of double-break design as seen at left which reduces arcing and subsequent pitting of contacts Each contact is operated by a double surface cam one surface for closing the other surface for opening This construction provides opening and closing action not dependent on springs

Keyed Escutcheons and Removable Handles -The removable handle commonly used in synshychronizing switches can be made to be reshymoved in any one of the eight positions There are three keys set in front of the handle so that they fit the designated keyways in the escutcshyheon in a desired position The escutcheon can be keyed so that a handle is interchangeshyable or non-interchangeable with another switch If this is desired the catalogue number of the other switch and the position in which the handle is to be removed must be given The removable handle is not furnished with the switch but as a separate item

-Slip Cams The slip cam is basically used on breaker conshytrol switches The slip action enables a contact to remain closed or open after returning to the normal (12 oclock) position from either the CW or CCW positions

I

I

6

I

- Positioning Contacts of the SBM switch are positively positioned by a detent wheel mounted on a square shaft and acted upon by a springshyloaded roller arm If the shaft of the 45deg switch is not rotated more than one-half the distance between positions it will snap back to its prior position If rotated more than half the distance between positions it will snap to the next posishytion The 90deg switch has this same positive detent action when in position but the snapshyping action is not as prominent Up to eight positions are available with 45deg or 90deg between positions

-Terminal Connections Terminal connections are brought to the corners of each stage allowing screw connections to be made over a large angle This angular displacement of connection points allows the switches to be mounted on three-inch centers or less

Jumpers Jumpers are furnished assembled where required on all standard listed switches For special switches or unshylisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered-

-~ 1T)

Jumper Jumper 307V515P1 307V512P1 (Same Stage) (Adjacent

Stage)

Contacts Positions Handle End 3 2 1

1 X

o-t I-ltgt egt-11-ltgt X2

o-tl--0 X3 X

Break-Before-Make Contacts Contacts on SBM switches are normally non-overlapping (break-before-make) This sequence is illustrated above which shows that contact No 1 opens before contact No 2 closes

Another normal function is illustrated by contact No 3 which is shown closed in two adjacent positions When switching between these positions this contact will always remain closed

Spring Action Torsion springs return the switch handle to or towards the 12 oclock or No 3 position The travel of the handle is limited to 90deg to either side of posshyition 3 The switches may be furshynished with spring return both ways or only one way with maintaining action in the opposite direction You can also have spring return from posishytion No 1 (9 oclock) to position No 2 (10 oclock) andor spring return from position No 5 (3 oclock) to position No 4 (2 oclock) with maintained action in the other positions Torsion springs are housed in the rear half of the posishytioning chamber There is no need to modify the chamber to accommodate the springs

Add-A-Stage A one-half inch exentsion is provided on the rear of all switches with one to eight stages This extension enables a maximum of two adshyditional stages to be easily and economically coupled to the existing switch in the event more contacts are required Maximum number of stages including Add-A-Stage unit is 10 (20 contacts)

I I IContacts Handle End

i~IC~ cu tNrt) Oodj I xx xxxx X~inimiddot 2 XXX 3 X xx xxxx~1661 4 xx X

xx xx5 X xx~fl11bull 6X xx

Overlapping Contacts Overlapping contacts (make-before-break) contribute to the versatility of the SBM switch

Typical overlapping contacts are shown on model switch 10AA009 The asterisk () indishycates an intermediate (non-feel) position and shows the contacts overlapping In the 10AA009 when turning from the OFF position to reading position 1 (Phase 1) contact 2 doses at the intermediate position and before contact 1 which remained dosed through the intermediate position opens

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock mechanism is designed for spring-return switches When the handle is turned to the 9 oclock posishytion it can be pulled out and locked in that position When the handle is pushed in the handle spring returns to the normal position This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts but merely prevents the spring return of the handle

7

I Contacts numbered for easy identification

Circuit designation plate is marked for easy identification of switch functions

Good selection handles

Escutcheon plates of pershymanent-finish molded material are neat in appearance and uniform in size

Front aupport spaces body of switch ~ inch from rear of the pane allowing ample room for inaerting leads into the switch

Protective cover (not shown) completely covers all live parts meets NEMA 1 requireshyments for panel mounted switches

Type SB-1 Switch With Cover Removed

SB-1 Switch Provides Flexible Dependable Control for

Electrically-operated Equipment Type SB-1 switches are rotary camshyoperated devices for the control of electrically-operated circuit breakers small motors magnetic switches and similar devices and for the transfer of meters instruments and relays The Type SB-1 switch has molded cams assembled on a square shaft to prevent slipping Rotation of the shaft moves cams directly against contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact Contact action is not dependent on springs

Silver-To-Silver Contacts Silver-to-silver contacts operate with

a positive wiping action to provide lowshyresistance current flow Contacts can be removed independently of other switch parts Barriers between adjacenl conshytacts prevent arcing between circuits The switch complete with cover can be obtained with up to 16 stages two electrically separate contacts per stage and for mounting on panels from 1e to 2 thick The panel thickness should be specified when the switch is ordered if it is not the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to frac34t thick The SB-1 switch which has a standard insulating cover meets NEMA I requireshyments for panel mounting

Standard Parts Flexibility and low initial cost are the results of standardizing a basically -simple design Standard SB-1 switches are available for most applications For special applications switches can be built from standard parts The long~ wearing cams positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contacts and positive contact opening and closing action all contribute to a switch which is high in quality and will give you many years of dependable service

SB-1 is recognized under the component proshygram of Underwriters Laboratories Inc

I

8

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

I

This publication provides descriptive technical selection and ordering information on control and transfer switches manufactured by General Electric Company

To aid selection and specification general arrangements and contact diagrams are included for the many models of the standard switches described on the opposite page Several standard circuits are illustrated for the common applications such as circuit breaker control and ammeter-voltmeter transfer Select the model which applies and order by model number only using the appropriate ordering guide If the standard switch is satisfactory except for some minor exception specify the exception along with the appropriate catalog number

If a standard model does not meet your application follow the ordering instructions given in this publication to specify the functions you need or order by similar to except (state the exception) Use one of the following forms to place your order

Form GED-3933-for SBM switches only Form GED-3934-for SB-1-9-10 switches

Part 1-Standard features Part 2-Optional features

For convenience copies of these forms have been included in this publication which can be reproduced in lieu of the forms

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern Pa 19355

Introduction

3

I

PAGE

TYPE SBM SWITCH FEATURES 5 -TYPE SB-1 SWITCH FEATURES 8

OPTIONAL FEATURES-_

SBE ELECTRIC OR HAND OPERATEDCAM ACTION AND LIMITATIONS

OVERLAPPING CONTACTS

REMOVABLE HANDLES

TEMPERATURE METER SWITCHES

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

TYPE SB-9 SWITCH FEATURES 9

TYPE SB-10 SWITCH FEATURES - middot10

SPECIAL FEATURES SB-1 SB-9 SB-10 middot11

TANDEM SWITCHES 14

PULL-TO-TURN middot 14

PAILADIUM CONTACTS 14

LOCK TYPE SWITCHES _14

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot16

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot ~ ~ 18

(SBM SB-1 SB-9) 20

(SB-1) middot- 22

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) 23

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR TANDEM SWITCHES 27

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR LOCKED SWITCHES 28

CONTACT DIAGRAMS_FOR SBM SWITCHES 29

CONTACT DIAGRAMS FOR SB-1 SWITCHES 43

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SBM SWITCHES 60

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SB-1-9-10 SWITCHES 63

FORM GED-3933 SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 69

FORM GED-3934 PART 1 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES STANDARD FEATURES 70

FORM GED-3934 PART 2 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES SPECIAL FEATURES 71

FIELD MODIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TYPE SBM CONTROL SWITCH 72

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SBM SWITCHES 74

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SB-1 AND SB-9 SWITCHES 75

I

4

I Construction Features

Escutcheons Two basic types of escutcheons are available the standard and the target The standard type shown on the left is a molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of the positions A target type escutcheon shown in the middle is normally furshynished on breaker control switches An aluminum front plate houses the target mechanism with a window in the center to show green for the trip posishytion red for the closed position and black for the pull-to-lock position The

a PISTOL GRIP OVAL

Handles Four types of molded black phenolic handles shaped for easy gripping are available with the SBM switch pistol grip oval knurled and lever Any of the standard handles except the lever may be adapted for removable handle keying A fixed handle may be easily removed for replacement by a screw in the front of the handle A white

KEYED

target has a slip action so that it will remain green when the handle returns to NORMAL from the TRIP position and red when it returns from the CLOSE position This shows the operator the last operation of the switch

On the right a modified standard is shown with keyways for use with a removable type handle

Aluminum circuit designation plates are available for all three types

4KNURLED LEVER

pointer furnished with the handles (except the lever) and mounted near the escutcheon give a clear identishyfication of the position that the handle is in For match and line up with SB-1 switches type SB-1 pistol grip oval knurled and round handles can be furshynished for use with SBM switches

Cams and Contacts The silver to silver contacts of the SBM switch are of double-break design as seen at left which reduces arcing and subsequent pitting of contacts Each contact is operated by a double surface cam one surface for closing the other surface for opening This construction provides opening and closing action not dependent on springs

Keyed Escutcheons and Removable Handles -The removable handle commonly used in synshychronizing switches can be made to be reshymoved in any one of the eight positions There are three keys set in front of the handle so that they fit the designated keyways in the escutcshyheon in a desired position The escutcheon can be keyed so that a handle is interchangeshyable or non-interchangeable with another switch If this is desired the catalogue number of the other switch and the position in which the handle is to be removed must be given The removable handle is not furnished with the switch but as a separate item

-Slip Cams The slip cam is basically used on breaker conshytrol switches The slip action enables a contact to remain closed or open after returning to the normal (12 oclock) position from either the CW or CCW positions

I

I

6

I

- Positioning Contacts of the SBM switch are positively positioned by a detent wheel mounted on a square shaft and acted upon by a springshyloaded roller arm If the shaft of the 45deg switch is not rotated more than one-half the distance between positions it will snap back to its prior position If rotated more than half the distance between positions it will snap to the next posishytion The 90deg switch has this same positive detent action when in position but the snapshyping action is not as prominent Up to eight positions are available with 45deg or 90deg between positions

-Terminal Connections Terminal connections are brought to the corners of each stage allowing screw connections to be made over a large angle This angular displacement of connection points allows the switches to be mounted on three-inch centers or less

Jumpers Jumpers are furnished assembled where required on all standard listed switches For special switches or unshylisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered-

-~ 1T)

Jumper Jumper 307V515P1 307V512P1 (Same Stage) (Adjacent

Stage)

Contacts Positions Handle End 3 2 1

1 X

o-t I-ltgt egt-11-ltgt X2

o-tl--0 X3 X

Break-Before-Make Contacts Contacts on SBM switches are normally non-overlapping (break-before-make) This sequence is illustrated above which shows that contact No 1 opens before contact No 2 closes

Another normal function is illustrated by contact No 3 which is shown closed in two adjacent positions When switching between these positions this contact will always remain closed

Spring Action Torsion springs return the switch handle to or towards the 12 oclock or No 3 position The travel of the handle is limited to 90deg to either side of posshyition 3 The switches may be furshynished with spring return both ways or only one way with maintaining action in the opposite direction You can also have spring return from posishytion No 1 (9 oclock) to position No 2 (10 oclock) andor spring return from position No 5 (3 oclock) to position No 4 (2 oclock) with maintained action in the other positions Torsion springs are housed in the rear half of the posishytioning chamber There is no need to modify the chamber to accommodate the springs

Add-A-Stage A one-half inch exentsion is provided on the rear of all switches with one to eight stages This extension enables a maximum of two adshyditional stages to be easily and economically coupled to the existing switch in the event more contacts are required Maximum number of stages including Add-A-Stage unit is 10 (20 contacts)

I I IContacts Handle End

i~IC~ cu tNrt) Oodj I xx xxxx X~inimiddot 2 XXX 3 X xx xxxx~1661 4 xx X

xx xx5 X xx~fl11bull 6X xx

Overlapping Contacts Overlapping contacts (make-before-break) contribute to the versatility of the SBM switch

Typical overlapping contacts are shown on model switch 10AA009 The asterisk () indishycates an intermediate (non-feel) position and shows the contacts overlapping In the 10AA009 when turning from the OFF position to reading position 1 (Phase 1) contact 2 doses at the intermediate position and before contact 1 which remained dosed through the intermediate position opens

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock mechanism is designed for spring-return switches When the handle is turned to the 9 oclock posishytion it can be pulled out and locked in that position When the handle is pushed in the handle spring returns to the normal position This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts but merely prevents the spring return of the handle

7

I Contacts numbered for easy identification

Circuit designation plate is marked for easy identification of switch functions

Good selection handles

Escutcheon plates of pershymanent-finish molded material are neat in appearance and uniform in size

Front aupport spaces body of switch ~ inch from rear of the pane allowing ample room for inaerting leads into the switch

Protective cover (not shown) completely covers all live parts meets NEMA 1 requireshyments for panel mounted switches

Type SB-1 Switch With Cover Removed

SB-1 Switch Provides Flexible Dependable Control for

Electrically-operated Equipment Type SB-1 switches are rotary camshyoperated devices for the control of electrically-operated circuit breakers small motors magnetic switches and similar devices and for the transfer of meters instruments and relays The Type SB-1 switch has molded cams assembled on a square shaft to prevent slipping Rotation of the shaft moves cams directly against contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact Contact action is not dependent on springs

Silver-To-Silver Contacts Silver-to-silver contacts operate with

a positive wiping action to provide lowshyresistance current flow Contacts can be removed independently of other switch parts Barriers between adjacenl conshytacts prevent arcing between circuits The switch complete with cover can be obtained with up to 16 stages two electrically separate contacts per stage and for mounting on panels from 1e to 2 thick The panel thickness should be specified when the switch is ordered if it is not the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to frac34t thick The SB-1 switch which has a standard insulating cover meets NEMA I requireshyments for panel mounting

Standard Parts Flexibility and low initial cost are the results of standardizing a basically -simple design Standard SB-1 switches are available for most applications For special applications switches can be built from standard parts The long~ wearing cams positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contacts and positive contact opening and closing action all contribute to a switch which is high in quality and will give you many years of dependable service

SB-1 is recognized under the component proshygram of Underwriters Laboratories Inc

I

8

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

I

PAGE

TYPE SBM SWITCH FEATURES 5 -TYPE SB-1 SWITCH FEATURES 8

OPTIONAL FEATURES-_

SBE ELECTRIC OR HAND OPERATEDCAM ACTION AND LIMITATIONS

OVERLAPPING CONTACTS

REMOVABLE HANDLES

TEMPERATURE METER SWITCHES

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

TYPE SB-9 SWITCH FEATURES 9

TYPE SB-10 SWITCH FEATURES - middot10

SPECIAL FEATURES SB-1 SB-9 SB-10 middot11

TANDEM SWITCHES 14

PULL-TO-TURN middot 14

PAILADIUM CONTACTS 14

LOCK TYPE SWITCHES _14

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot16

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) middot ~ ~ 18

(SBM SB-1 SB-9) 20

(SB-1) middot- 22

(SBM SB-1 SB-9 SB-10) 23

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR TANDEM SWITCHES 27

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR LOCKED SWITCHES 28

CONTACT DIAGRAMS_FOR SBM SWITCHES 29

CONTACT DIAGRAMS FOR SB-1 SWITCHES 43

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SBM SWITCHES 60

ORDERING GUIDE FOR SB-1-9-10 SWITCHES 63

FORM GED-3933 SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 69

FORM GED-3934 PART 1 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES STANDARD FEATURES 70

FORM GED-3934 PART 2 SPECIFICATION FORM SB-1 SWITCHES SPECIAL FEATURES 71

FIELD MODIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TYPE SBM CONTROL SWITCH 72

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SBM SWITCHES 74

NOMENCLATURE GUIDE TYPE SB-1 AND SB-9 SWITCHES 75

I

4

I Construction Features

Escutcheons Two basic types of escutcheons are available the standard and the target The standard type shown on the left is a molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of the positions A target type escutcheon shown in the middle is normally furshynished on breaker control switches An aluminum front plate houses the target mechanism with a window in the center to show green for the trip posishytion red for the closed position and black for the pull-to-lock position The

a PISTOL GRIP OVAL

Handles Four types of molded black phenolic handles shaped for easy gripping are available with the SBM switch pistol grip oval knurled and lever Any of the standard handles except the lever may be adapted for removable handle keying A fixed handle may be easily removed for replacement by a screw in the front of the handle A white

KEYED

target has a slip action so that it will remain green when the handle returns to NORMAL from the TRIP position and red when it returns from the CLOSE position This shows the operator the last operation of the switch

On the right a modified standard is shown with keyways for use with a removable type handle

Aluminum circuit designation plates are available for all three types

4KNURLED LEVER

pointer furnished with the handles (except the lever) and mounted near the escutcheon give a clear identishyfication of the position that the handle is in For match and line up with SB-1 switches type SB-1 pistol grip oval knurled and round handles can be furshynished for use with SBM switches

Cams and Contacts The silver to silver contacts of the SBM switch are of double-break design as seen at left which reduces arcing and subsequent pitting of contacts Each contact is operated by a double surface cam one surface for closing the other surface for opening This construction provides opening and closing action not dependent on springs

Keyed Escutcheons and Removable Handles -The removable handle commonly used in synshychronizing switches can be made to be reshymoved in any one of the eight positions There are three keys set in front of the handle so that they fit the designated keyways in the escutcshyheon in a desired position The escutcheon can be keyed so that a handle is interchangeshyable or non-interchangeable with another switch If this is desired the catalogue number of the other switch and the position in which the handle is to be removed must be given The removable handle is not furnished with the switch but as a separate item

-Slip Cams The slip cam is basically used on breaker conshytrol switches The slip action enables a contact to remain closed or open after returning to the normal (12 oclock) position from either the CW or CCW positions

I

I

6

I

- Positioning Contacts of the SBM switch are positively positioned by a detent wheel mounted on a square shaft and acted upon by a springshyloaded roller arm If the shaft of the 45deg switch is not rotated more than one-half the distance between positions it will snap back to its prior position If rotated more than half the distance between positions it will snap to the next posishytion The 90deg switch has this same positive detent action when in position but the snapshyping action is not as prominent Up to eight positions are available with 45deg or 90deg between positions

-Terminal Connections Terminal connections are brought to the corners of each stage allowing screw connections to be made over a large angle This angular displacement of connection points allows the switches to be mounted on three-inch centers or less

Jumpers Jumpers are furnished assembled where required on all standard listed switches For special switches or unshylisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered-

-~ 1T)

Jumper Jumper 307V515P1 307V512P1 (Same Stage) (Adjacent

Stage)

Contacts Positions Handle End 3 2 1

1 X

o-t I-ltgt egt-11-ltgt X2

o-tl--0 X3 X

Break-Before-Make Contacts Contacts on SBM switches are normally non-overlapping (break-before-make) This sequence is illustrated above which shows that contact No 1 opens before contact No 2 closes

Another normal function is illustrated by contact No 3 which is shown closed in two adjacent positions When switching between these positions this contact will always remain closed

Spring Action Torsion springs return the switch handle to or towards the 12 oclock or No 3 position The travel of the handle is limited to 90deg to either side of posshyition 3 The switches may be furshynished with spring return both ways or only one way with maintaining action in the opposite direction You can also have spring return from posishytion No 1 (9 oclock) to position No 2 (10 oclock) andor spring return from position No 5 (3 oclock) to position No 4 (2 oclock) with maintained action in the other positions Torsion springs are housed in the rear half of the posishytioning chamber There is no need to modify the chamber to accommodate the springs

Add-A-Stage A one-half inch exentsion is provided on the rear of all switches with one to eight stages This extension enables a maximum of two adshyditional stages to be easily and economically coupled to the existing switch in the event more contacts are required Maximum number of stages including Add-A-Stage unit is 10 (20 contacts)

I I IContacts Handle End

i~IC~ cu tNrt) Oodj I xx xxxx X~inimiddot 2 XXX 3 X xx xxxx~1661 4 xx X

xx xx5 X xx~fl11bull 6X xx

Overlapping Contacts Overlapping contacts (make-before-break) contribute to the versatility of the SBM switch

Typical overlapping contacts are shown on model switch 10AA009 The asterisk () indishycates an intermediate (non-feel) position and shows the contacts overlapping In the 10AA009 when turning from the OFF position to reading position 1 (Phase 1) contact 2 doses at the intermediate position and before contact 1 which remained dosed through the intermediate position opens

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock mechanism is designed for spring-return switches When the handle is turned to the 9 oclock posishytion it can be pulled out and locked in that position When the handle is pushed in the handle spring returns to the normal position This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts but merely prevents the spring return of the handle

7

I Contacts numbered for easy identification

Circuit designation plate is marked for easy identification of switch functions

Good selection handles

Escutcheon plates of pershymanent-finish molded material are neat in appearance and uniform in size

Front aupport spaces body of switch ~ inch from rear of the pane allowing ample room for inaerting leads into the switch

Protective cover (not shown) completely covers all live parts meets NEMA 1 requireshyments for panel mounted switches

Type SB-1 Switch With Cover Removed

SB-1 Switch Provides Flexible Dependable Control for

Electrically-operated Equipment Type SB-1 switches are rotary camshyoperated devices for the control of electrically-operated circuit breakers small motors magnetic switches and similar devices and for the transfer of meters instruments and relays The Type SB-1 switch has molded cams assembled on a square shaft to prevent slipping Rotation of the shaft moves cams directly against contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact Contact action is not dependent on springs

Silver-To-Silver Contacts Silver-to-silver contacts operate with

a positive wiping action to provide lowshyresistance current flow Contacts can be removed independently of other switch parts Barriers between adjacenl conshytacts prevent arcing between circuits The switch complete with cover can be obtained with up to 16 stages two electrically separate contacts per stage and for mounting on panels from 1e to 2 thick The panel thickness should be specified when the switch is ordered if it is not the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to frac34t thick The SB-1 switch which has a standard insulating cover meets NEMA I requireshyments for panel mounting

Standard Parts Flexibility and low initial cost are the results of standardizing a basically -simple design Standard SB-1 switches are available for most applications For special applications switches can be built from standard parts The long~ wearing cams positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contacts and positive contact opening and closing action all contribute to a switch which is high in quality and will give you many years of dependable service

SB-1 is recognized under the component proshygram of Underwriters Laboratories Inc

I

8

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

I Construction Features

Escutcheons Two basic types of escutcheons are available the standard and the target The standard type shown on the left is a molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of the positions A target type escutcheon shown in the middle is normally furshynished on breaker control switches An aluminum front plate houses the target mechanism with a window in the center to show green for the trip posishytion red for the closed position and black for the pull-to-lock position The

a PISTOL GRIP OVAL

Handles Four types of molded black phenolic handles shaped for easy gripping are available with the SBM switch pistol grip oval knurled and lever Any of the standard handles except the lever may be adapted for removable handle keying A fixed handle may be easily removed for replacement by a screw in the front of the handle A white

KEYED

target has a slip action so that it will remain green when the handle returns to NORMAL from the TRIP position and red when it returns from the CLOSE position This shows the operator the last operation of the switch

On the right a modified standard is shown with keyways for use with a removable type handle

Aluminum circuit designation plates are available for all three types

4KNURLED LEVER

pointer furnished with the handles (except the lever) and mounted near the escutcheon give a clear identishyfication of the position that the handle is in For match and line up with SB-1 switches type SB-1 pistol grip oval knurled and round handles can be furshynished for use with SBM switches

Cams and Contacts The silver to silver contacts of the SBM switch are of double-break design as seen at left which reduces arcing and subsequent pitting of contacts Each contact is operated by a double surface cam one surface for closing the other surface for opening This construction provides opening and closing action not dependent on springs

Keyed Escutcheons and Removable Handles -The removable handle commonly used in synshychronizing switches can be made to be reshymoved in any one of the eight positions There are three keys set in front of the handle so that they fit the designated keyways in the escutcshyheon in a desired position The escutcheon can be keyed so that a handle is interchangeshyable or non-interchangeable with another switch If this is desired the catalogue number of the other switch and the position in which the handle is to be removed must be given The removable handle is not furnished with the switch but as a separate item

-Slip Cams The slip cam is basically used on breaker conshytrol switches The slip action enables a contact to remain closed or open after returning to the normal (12 oclock) position from either the CW or CCW positions

I

I

6

I

- Positioning Contacts of the SBM switch are positively positioned by a detent wheel mounted on a square shaft and acted upon by a springshyloaded roller arm If the shaft of the 45deg switch is not rotated more than one-half the distance between positions it will snap back to its prior position If rotated more than half the distance between positions it will snap to the next posishytion The 90deg switch has this same positive detent action when in position but the snapshyping action is not as prominent Up to eight positions are available with 45deg or 90deg between positions

-Terminal Connections Terminal connections are brought to the corners of each stage allowing screw connections to be made over a large angle This angular displacement of connection points allows the switches to be mounted on three-inch centers or less

Jumpers Jumpers are furnished assembled where required on all standard listed switches For special switches or unshylisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered-

-~ 1T)

Jumper Jumper 307V515P1 307V512P1 (Same Stage) (Adjacent

Stage)

Contacts Positions Handle End 3 2 1

1 X

o-t I-ltgt egt-11-ltgt X2

o-tl--0 X3 X

Break-Before-Make Contacts Contacts on SBM switches are normally non-overlapping (break-before-make) This sequence is illustrated above which shows that contact No 1 opens before contact No 2 closes

Another normal function is illustrated by contact No 3 which is shown closed in two adjacent positions When switching between these positions this contact will always remain closed

Spring Action Torsion springs return the switch handle to or towards the 12 oclock or No 3 position The travel of the handle is limited to 90deg to either side of posshyition 3 The switches may be furshynished with spring return both ways or only one way with maintaining action in the opposite direction You can also have spring return from posishytion No 1 (9 oclock) to position No 2 (10 oclock) andor spring return from position No 5 (3 oclock) to position No 4 (2 oclock) with maintained action in the other positions Torsion springs are housed in the rear half of the posishytioning chamber There is no need to modify the chamber to accommodate the springs

Add-A-Stage A one-half inch exentsion is provided on the rear of all switches with one to eight stages This extension enables a maximum of two adshyditional stages to be easily and economically coupled to the existing switch in the event more contacts are required Maximum number of stages including Add-A-Stage unit is 10 (20 contacts)

I I IContacts Handle End

i~IC~ cu tNrt) Oodj I xx xxxx X~inimiddot 2 XXX 3 X xx xxxx~1661 4 xx X

xx xx5 X xx~fl11bull 6X xx

Overlapping Contacts Overlapping contacts (make-before-break) contribute to the versatility of the SBM switch

Typical overlapping contacts are shown on model switch 10AA009 The asterisk () indishycates an intermediate (non-feel) position and shows the contacts overlapping In the 10AA009 when turning from the OFF position to reading position 1 (Phase 1) contact 2 doses at the intermediate position and before contact 1 which remained dosed through the intermediate position opens

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock mechanism is designed for spring-return switches When the handle is turned to the 9 oclock posishytion it can be pulled out and locked in that position When the handle is pushed in the handle spring returns to the normal position This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts but merely prevents the spring return of the handle

7

I Contacts numbered for easy identification

Circuit designation plate is marked for easy identification of switch functions

Good selection handles

Escutcheon plates of pershymanent-finish molded material are neat in appearance and uniform in size

Front aupport spaces body of switch ~ inch from rear of the pane allowing ample room for inaerting leads into the switch

Protective cover (not shown) completely covers all live parts meets NEMA 1 requireshyments for panel mounted switches

Type SB-1 Switch With Cover Removed

SB-1 Switch Provides Flexible Dependable Control for

Electrically-operated Equipment Type SB-1 switches are rotary camshyoperated devices for the control of electrically-operated circuit breakers small motors magnetic switches and similar devices and for the transfer of meters instruments and relays The Type SB-1 switch has molded cams assembled on a square shaft to prevent slipping Rotation of the shaft moves cams directly against contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact Contact action is not dependent on springs

Silver-To-Silver Contacts Silver-to-silver contacts operate with

a positive wiping action to provide lowshyresistance current flow Contacts can be removed independently of other switch parts Barriers between adjacenl conshytacts prevent arcing between circuits The switch complete with cover can be obtained with up to 16 stages two electrically separate contacts per stage and for mounting on panels from 1e to 2 thick The panel thickness should be specified when the switch is ordered if it is not the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to frac34t thick The SB-1 switch which has a standard insulating cover meets NEMA I requireshyments for panel mounting

Standard Parts Flexibility and low initial cost are the results of standardizing a basically -simple design Standard SB-1 switches are available for most applications For special applications switches can be built from standard parts The long~ wearing cams positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contacts and positive contact opening and closing action all contribute to a switch which is high in quality and will give you many years of dependable service

SB-1 is recognized under the component proshygram of Underwriters Laboratories Inc

I

8

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

I

- Positioning Contacts of the SBM switch are positively positioned by a detent wheel mounted on a square shaft and acted upon by a springshyloaded roller arm If the shaft of the 45deg switch is not rotated more than one-half the distance between positions it will snap back to its prior position If rotated more than half the distance between positions it will snap to the next posishytion The 90deg switch has this same positive detent action when in position but the snapshyping action is not as prominent Up to eight positions are available with 45deg or 90deg between positions

-Terminal Connections Terminal connections are brought to the corners of each stage allowing screw connections to be made over a large angle This angular displacement of connection points allows the switches to be mounted on three-inch centers or less

Jumpers Jumpers are furnished assembled where required on all standard listed switches For special switches or unshylisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered-

-~ 1T)

Jumper Jumper 307V515P1 307V512P1 (Same Stage) (Adjacent

Stage)

Contacts Positions Handle End 3 2 1

1 X

o-t I-ltgt egt-11-ltgt X2

o-tl--0 X3 X

Break-Before-Make Contacts Contacts on SBM switches are normally non-overlapping (break-before-make) This sequence is illustrated above which shows that contact No 1 opens before contact No 2 closes

Another normal function is illustrated by contact No 3 which is shown closed in two adjacent positions When switching between these positions this contact will always remain closed

Spring Action Torsion springs return the switch handle to or towards the 12 oclock or No 3 position The travel of the handle is limited to 90deg to either side of posshyition 3 The switches may be furshynished with spring return both ways or only one way with maintaining action in the opposite direction You can also have spring return from posishytion No 1 (9 oclock) to position No 2 (10 oclock) andor spring return from position No 5 (3 oclock) to position No 4 (2 oclock) with maintained action in the other positions Torsion springs are housed in the rear half of the posishytioning chamber There is no need to modify the chamber to accommodate the springs

Add-A-Stage A one-half inch exentsion is provided on the rear of all switches with one to eight stages This extension enables a maximum of two adshyditional stages to be easily and economically coupled to the existing switch in the event more contacts are required Maximum number of stages including Add-A-Stage unit is 10 (20 contacts)

I I IContacts Handle End

i~IC~ cu tNrt) Oodj I xx xxxx X~inimiddot 2 XXX 3 X xx xxxx~1661 4 xx X

xx xx5 X xx~fl11bull 6X xx

Overlapping Contacts Overlapping contacts (make-before-break) contribute to the versatility of the SBM switch

Typical overlapping contacts are shown on model switch 10AA009 The asterisk () indishycates an intermediate (non-feel) position and shows the contacts overlapping In the 10AA009 when turning from the OFF position to reading position 1 (Phase 1) contact 2 doses at the intermediate position and before contact 1 which remained dosed through the intermediate position opens

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock mechanism is designed for spring-return switches When the handle is turned to the 9 oclock posishytion it can be pulled out and locked in that position When the handle is pushed in the handle spring returns to the normal position This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts but merely prevents the spring return of the handle

7

I Contacts numbered for easy identification

Circuit designation plate is marked for easy identification of switch functions

Good selection handles

Escutcheon plates of pershymanent-finish molded material are neat in appearance and uniform in size

Front aupport spaces body of switch ~ inch from rear of the pane allowing ample room for inaerting leads into the switch

Protective cover (not shown) completely covers all live parts meets NEMA 1 requireshyments for panel mounted switches

Type SB-1 Switch With Cover Removed

SB-1 Switch Provides Flexible Dependable Control for

Electrically-operated Equipment Type SB-1 switches are rotary camshyoperated devices for the control of electrically-operated circuit breakers small motors magnetic switches and similar devices and for the transfer of meters instruments and relays The Type SB-1 switch has molded cams assembled on a square shaft to prevent slipping Rotation of the shaft moves cams directly against contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact Contact action is not dependent on springs

Silver-To-Silver Contacts Silver-to-silver contacts operate with

a positive wiping action to provide lowshyresistance current flow Contacts can be removed independently of other switch parts Barriers between adjacenl conshytacts prevent arcing between circuits The switch complete with cover can be obtained with up to 16 stages two electrically separate contacts per stage and for mounting on panels from 1e to 2 thick The panel thickness should be specified when the switch is ordered if it is not the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to frac34t thick The SB-1 switch which has a standard insulating cover meets NEMA I requireshyments for panel mounting

Standard Parts Flexibility and low initial cost are the results of standardizing a basically -simple design Standard SB-1 switches are available for most applications For special applications switches can be built from standard parts The long~ wearing cams positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contacts and positive contact opening and closing action all contribute to a switch which is high in quality and will give you many years of dependable service

SB-1 is recognized under the component proshygram of Underwriters Laboratories Inc

I

8

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

I Contacts numbered for easy identification

Circuit designation plate is marked for easy identification of switch functions

Good selection handles

Escutcheon plates of pershymanent-finish molded material are neat in appearance and uniform in size

Front aupport spaces body of switch ~ inch from rear of the pane allowing ample room for inaerting leads into the switch

Protective cover (not shown) completely covers all live parts meets NEMA 1 requireshyments for panel mounted switches

Type SB-1 Switch With Cover Removed

SB-1 Switch Provides Flexible Dependable Control for

Electrically-operated Equipment Type SB-1 switches are rotary camshyoperated devices for the control of electrically-operated circuit breakers small motors magnetic switches and similar devices and for the transfer of meters instruments and relays The Type SB-1 switch has molded cams assembled on a square shaft to prevent slipping Rotation of the shaft moves cams directly against contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact Contact action is not dependent on springs

Silver-To-Silver Contacts Silver-to-silver contacts operate with

a positive wiping action to provide lowshyresistance current flow Contacts can be removed independently of other switch parts Barriers between adjacenl conshytacts prevent arcing between circuits The switch complete with cover can be obtained with up to 16 stages two electrically separate contacts per stage and for mounting on panels from 1e to 2 thick The panel thickness should be specified when the switch is ordered if it is not the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to frac34t thick The SB-1 switch which has a standard insulating cover meets NEMA I requireshyments for panel mounting

Standard Parts Flexibility and low initial cost are the results of standardizing a basically -simple design Standard SB-1 switches are available for most applications For special applications switches can be built from standard parts The long~ wearing cams positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contacts and positive contact opening and closing action all contribute to a switch which is high in quality and will give you many years of dependable service

SB-1 is recognized under the component proshygram of Underwriters Laboratories Inc

I

8

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

Silver-to-siver contacts-opershy Permanent-finish molded es-ate with positive wiping action cutcheon

Contacts numbered identification

for easy Large pistol grip recommended _

handle is

Heavy-duty shunt connections can withstand millions of conshytact operations

Heavy-duty posilionfng wheel is held in place by compresshysion spring to assure positive positioning Type SB-9 Switch with Cover Removed

Removable cover (not shown) encloses all live parts

SB-9 Control Switch Designed for Highly Repetitive Service

-

-

The Type SB-9 switch for heavy-duty service is used where repetitive operashytions run into many thousands per week The SB-9 switch is similar to the SB-1 except that it has a more positive posishytioning device better insulation to ground and more substantial bearings The contact development diagrams for specific applications follow the same general form as for the SB-1

Ratings

Type SB-1 9 amp 10 switches are rated 600 volts 20 amps continuous or 250 amps for three seconds The interruptshying rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit and the number of contacts connected in series as

Circuit Volts 1

24 D-c 6

548 D-c

25125 D-c

75250 D-c

25600 D-c

115 A-c 40

220 A-c 25

440 A-c 12

Inductive Circuit Non-Inductive Circuit

Number of Contacts

2 in Series 4 in Series2 In Series 1 4 in Series

Interrupting Rating in Amperes

20 430 30

1540 3 2525

62511 25 2 95

7 1752 8 65

135 15 35 12545

75 24 50

12 25 4050

1225 5 20

1512 104indicated in the table Contacts can be 550 A-c 6 paralleled when current exceeds 20

Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit For circuits having high values ofamps inductance refer application to your General Electric representative for recommendations

SB-1 amp 9 are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 9

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

Removable cover (not shown) Lateral stage contacts open Rotary stages contacts open encloses all live parts and close with push or pull of and close with rotation of

handle handle left or right

Molded escutcheon plate has durable finish and clear markshying

Type SB-1 oSwitch Without Cover

Lateral contacts give SB-10 switch increased versatility

The SB-10 Switch contacts The lateral contacts which The S8-10 switch is similar to the SB-1 provide two electrically separate and switch except for the addition of lateral mechanically independent switches in

Lateral action of SB-10 switch One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages middot Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in

Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8 - Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

-

one device are located at the handle end of the switch The lateral contacts operate independently of the rotary I contacts There may be as many as four stages of lateral contacts (two contacts per stage) The lateral action capabilities of SB-10 switches are given in the table The maximum number of stages including rotary contacts is 12 Lateral contacts on the same stage must open and close together There are only two lateral positions IN or OUT Contacts may be closed in either position A spring can be furshynished so that one of the positions is momentary Rotary contacts may have a spring to return the switch to neutral rotary position When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring reshy -turn the lateral spring can be loaded in the neutral rotary position only Interlocks may be provided so that the lateral action can be made in one or more rotary positions Interlocks may also be provided to prevent rotary action in the IN or OUT positions or to permit rotary action in both the IN or OUT positions The same types of fixed handles and escutcheons used on S8-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switches -Drilling dimensions are the same as the SB-1

silver contacts

Barriers between adjacent conshytacts prevents arcing between circuits

10

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

bull Special Features se-1 9 10

-

-

PositionsA The maximum number of positions is 12B Position locations and throws are availashyC ble as shownD

E F

Handles

A Round 6047044-1 B Oval 6046075-1 C Radial 6047043-1 D Knurled 6079120-1

Handles Seven different types of fixed handles are shown The handles are designed for durability comfortable grip and pleasing appearance An arrow is embedded in the oval and pistol-grip handles for visual aid in positioning A white pointer is furnished with the knurled and round handles To prevent inadvertent operation of equipshyment by unauthorized persons a removable type handle is available for the SB-1 or SB-9 switches The removable handle is keyed to fit the escutcheon in a specific position All but the radial and the lever type handles can be furnished with keyed shanks as removable type handles The handle can be removed in any one or two positions and such positions should be specified when the switch is ordered

Escutcheons The escutcheon is made of molded black phenolic material with white lettering for clear reading of position labels

G

E Large Pistol Grip 6208137-1 F Lever 6248034-1 G Pistol Grip 6046074-1 H Removable Oval

Types of escutcheons 1 The standard type C or E or F above is used when all positions are at the horishyzontal or above 2 The round type A or D above is used when there are positions below the horishyzontal

3 A target-type escutcheon B amp G above normally used on breaker control switches has a red and green target to indicate the last position to which the switch was turned Pull-to-lock target esshycutcheons are shown to the right (Note that maximum throw is 75 degrees counter-clockwise and 45 degrees clockwise)

4 Both the standard and the round type escutcheons can be furnished with keyshyways to interlock with the removable type handles so that the handle is removable only in a specific position

A separate circuit designation plate when furnished is mounted at the top of the escutcheon and is easily removable

2 POSITIONS 90deg APART bull

2 TO 4 POSITIONS 90deg APART 83

2 TO 5 POSITIONS 37 frac120 APART

2 TO 6 POSITIONS 60deg APART

2 TO 8 POSITIONS 45deg APART

2 TO 10 POSITIONS 36deg APART

2 TO 12 POSITIONS 30deg APART

Handle positions

A B

C

11

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

I Special Features ccoNT)

CLOSING CAM FOR ----H---t----- NO 2 CONTACT

CAM OPERATED CONTACTS

(FIG 10A)

Contacts and Jumpers Rotary contacts on SB-1 9 and 10 switches are normally break-beforeshymake Over-lapping contacts makeshybefore-break) are available and are used basically in ammeter switching applishycations Slip contact operation is availshyable for breaker control application Moving contacts are cam operated for positive opening and closing (Fig 10A) Stationary contacts are assembled on a common support mounted at the top of the switch for easy replacement Three types of stationary contacts are availshyable (Fig 10B)

A Electrlcally common with center binding post which affords single-break single-pole double-throw operation for two electrically common circuits

B Electrically separate Each stage affords single-break single-pole service for two electrically separate circuits

C Electrically common without a center binding post affording two contacts for double-break action Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers (Fig 10C) Four difshyferent types are illustrated When jumpers are ordered with the switch they are supplied unassembled without additional cost They may also be purshychased separately and assembled on existing switches

Spring Return Action

3

Spring return can be adapted to any SB-1 9 and 10 switch providing these limitations are adhered to 1 The handle must return to or toward the 12 oclock position but not pass it 2 The maximum throw is 90deg to either side of the 12 oclock position 3 You cannot have a maintained posishytion pas a spring return position Example if spring return from pos 2 to pos 3 is desired pos 1 cannot be a maintained position However the funcshytional equivalent can be obtained by specifying a pull-to-lock action in place of the maintained position Spring return from both directions to NORMAL or spring return with mainshytained action can be provided on the same switch Example A Spring return from position 1 and 2 to 3 maintaining in positions 3 4 and 5 or spring return from 5 to 4 to 3 maintaining in positions 1 2 and 3

A

B o---U---o o---U--o

C o-lHt--o

(FIG 10B)

atgt flt ~ (SAME STAGE) (ALTERNATE STAGE) 307V512PI 6244177PI

ff Qnnu() 6149141 Pl 1455504PI (ADJACENT STAGE) (FLEXIBLE)

(FIG 10C)

IB A five position switch can be furshynished with partial spring return from positions 1 to 2 and or 5 to 4 with maintaining action in the remaining positions SB-9 only)

Pull-To-Lock A pull-to-lock may be added to lock the switch against spring return action Lockshying is accomplished by pulling the handle out in the pull-to-lock position to engage a latch which arrests the spring return The switch will remain in the locked posshyition until the handle is pushed in Note This pull-to-lock feature does not actuate contacts when pulled

The following are standard pull-to-lock combinations available with a standard target type escutcheon -A Spring return from all positions to NORMAL except when middot locked pull handle to lock at 75deg CCW

B Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW to NORMAL pull to initiate locking at 45deg CCW then turn to 75deg CCW and pull-to-lock

C Spring return from 45deg CW and CCW except when pulled-to-lock at 45deg CCW Special pull-to-lock switches can be I furnished however spring return action from the pull-to-lock position is reshyquired

12

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I

Optional Features se-1 9 10

PullTo-Turn A pull-to-turn feature can be incorporatshyed in a SB-1 or SB-9 switch to prevent accidental operation The handle is locked against turning when it is in the in position and must be pulled out to unlock and turn to the selected positions it is equipped with a lateral spring that pulls the handle to the in position

The handle can be locked against turning in one or more positions or can be free to rotate between certain positions while in the in QOsition

Locks Two different types of locks are availshyable Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions One lock is built into the operating handle The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch and when necessary can be coordinated with a Kirk key-interlock scheme When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position a 45-degree space must be provided between adjashycent locking positions Therefore eight is the maximum number of lock posishytions that can be furnished

Rotary spring action is not recommended with pull-to-turn because the lateral spring may not always overcome the roshytary spring and automatic return to neushytral may not always occur

Push-To-Turn The push-to-turn feature is almost the exact opposite of the above-shown pullshyto-turn feature and the same restriction as to the use of rotary spring return applies

Palladium Cltgtntacts Available for temperature meter switches Palladium contacts have a constant resistance factor which is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in temperature meter cirshycuits Silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuations in meter readings

13

Hand And Electrically Operated Switch Type SBE

~middot-

DESCRIPTION The SBE switch is basically a hand or electrically operarted SB-1 switch The electrical operation is acshycomplished by the use of a high-torshyque vdc motor regulated by the use of an electronic controller and atshytached to the switch by a clutch mechanism

The SB-1 switch portion consists of up to twelve customer-usable silver to silver cam operated contacts with a positive high pressure self-wiping action See Figure 2 for typical conshytact arrangement

The SBE is available for mounting on panels 1 16 to 1 8 thick

APPLICATION SBE switches can be used in place of

the manual-only circuit breaker control switches which can allow remote SCADA supervisory control Even though the SBE switch is longer than the standard SB-1 breaker control switch the panel space for either device is the same Therefore retrofitting manual-only locations with reshymote control is relatively easy

A typical contact wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2 Additional contacts can be used with a white indicating light or alarm to indicate a protective (not operator) trip Also provided are contact to be used with an automatic recloser interlock circuit

This same switch may also be used with different position engraving for opshyeration of motor-operated disconnect switches small motor contactors and similar bi-directional devices The applishycation should be checked for operation with a contact dwell time of 1 second in each direction (CW and CCW) when the SBE is operated electrically

BREAKER CONTROL

D$- middotmiddotmiddot- lto

i middot r-

~ ---

CONTACTS POSITIONS HANDLE

END CLOSE NORMAL AflER CLOSE

NORMAL AFHR TRIP

TRIP

1 2 1 X o--tHI--() 2 X

3 4 3 X X OmiddotH-0 o-H-o 4 X

5 6 5 X X o--l 1-o o--l 1-o 6 X X

Fig 1 SBE switch with cover removed

BURDENS For 125 VDC Motor at 150 VDC

bull 1 amp for 200 ms bull 07 amps for the second dwell period

RATINGS Operating Range of 125 VDC Motor Fig 2 SBE switch

bull 785 to 150 vdc Contact Arrangement

CONTACT RATING -NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF CONTACTS NUMBER OF CONTACTSCIRCUIT

VOLTS 42 4 2 11 INININ IN

SERIES SERIESSERIES SERIES

300 48 DC

40 20030024 DC 60 250

125 DC 400 30 150025050

95 250 DC

250 20 62511026 65

600 DC 80 07 17520075

125015 035135025 045

500 220 AC

2405004000115 AC 500 2502500 120 400

440 AC 2501200 200 550 AC

50 120 120 15 0600 40 100

The interrupting ratings of the conshy The contacts will carry 20 amps conshytacts vary with the inductance of the cirshy tinuously or 50 amps for 1 minute The cuit The values given above for de inshy contacts will close on 50 amps for volshyductivemiddot circuits are based on the avershy tages 600 volts or less age trip coil currents

14

I

I

(i) ---~--------------r---------------r--------125VOC

CLOSE TRIP 52CS(CW) (CCW)tl_ 52CS C

~ NAC NAT rcsTB Tl3 I 0 TB6

52CSJ_ 52CS 522E0 CIRCUJTC NAC CLOSE CJRCUITS

TBS52 b

PROTECTJVE TRIP ALARM

ANO OR INDICATING

LIGHT

52 a

~ 5CS 52 ~CNAC TC

AUTO RECLDSER INTLK

Fig 3 Typical Control Circuit with SBE (286A3555)

(-) ___j____________j______________________125VOC

15

The operating cam of SB-1 -9 and Cam Action and Limitations -10 switches is based on a 30-degree cut to each side of the center (Fig 1 ) A standard-profile cam will fully open or close a contact in 30 degrees making or breaking 15 degrees from

Fig 1 Operating cam for SB-1 -9 and -10 switches

NO I CONTACT r==== a OR

COMMON OPENING CAM

coR CLOSINGFRONT VIEW HANDLE CAM FOR NQIIN 12OdegCLOCK POSITION CONTACT NOT SHOWN

Fig 2 Composite view of contacts and cams

C B

Fig 3 Individual arrangements of cams in Fig 2

( BACK)POSITIONCONTACTS VIEW HANDLE END

3 2 I

1 I Xo-u--0-11--0 I 2 X X

Fig 4 Contact arrangement back view

the fully open or fully closed position Fig 2 is a composite view of I

contacts and cams assembled on a stage of a switch This figure shows that odd-numbered contacts are on the right side of the switch (viewed from the front) and are closed by the C cam Even-numbered contacts are on the left side and are closed by action of the A cam Both contacts are opened by the B cam

Fig 4 is the contact diagram for Fig 2 with Fig 3 showing the individual arrangement of cams

0 n e cam limitation must be -considered when the switch rotates 180 degrees or more Referring to Fig 3 you see that when cam B is rotated 180 degrees the same relationship occurs between the periphery of Cam B and the contact mechanism of Conshytact No 1 as occurred between the periphery and contact mechanism of Contact No 2 before rotation thereshyfore whatever happens to one contact at any point in the switch rotation must happen to its companion contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated 180 degrees Fig 5 shows the diagram of an unworkable and a I correct arrangement

When contacts on the same stage cannot be arranged to avoid this 180-degree cam limitation one contact per stage is used (See Fig 6) On five-position switches 37-1 2 degrees can be used instead of 45 degrees to avoid this limitation

SLIP CAMS Slip cams increase the flexibility of

the switch They allow a contact to be closed in the NORMAL position after returning from either the CW or CCW position and also to be open in the NORMAL position after returning from the opposite direction This -action is accomplished by allowing the cam to slip 45 degrees as shown in Fig 7 Once the shaft actuates the cam the shaft wil I then slip 45 degrees in the opposite direction without actuating the cam

This type of action is commonly used for circuit-breaker control applishycations Fig 8 shows a breaker conshytrol switch Model 16S8182 which has slip action on Contacts 7 and 8 With this slip action there are some -limitations Three of these limitations and how to avoid them are shown Limitation No 1 does not apply to the SBM switch because of the indepenshydent cams for each contact

16

I

Cam Action and Limitations (Contd) INCORRECT CORRECT

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) POSITIONS (BACK VIEW) ICONTACTSCONTACTS HANDLE END HANDLE END8 7 6 5 4 2 I3 8 7 5 4 3 2 I6

I 2 o-H-0 0-11--0

3 4 o-n-o o-11--0 5 6ltgtbullHo o-H-o 7 8 o~ o-H-o

Fig 7 Diagram showing

( I NCORRECTl

2 2N IN I

I 2 11 XX o-H--o o-H-o I 2 X X- (CORRECT)

2N IN I2

I I X X o-j l--0----

4

1-ltgt--lkgt 4 X X

Limitation No 1 (SB-1 -9 amp -10)

A slip contact and standard-

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 X X

X X

X

Fig 5

I

7

SLIP

STANDARD

X X

5

ESCUTCHEON ( FRONT VIEW)

X

Diagram

3

4

I 2 o-O-o o1-o 3 4 o-H-o o-H-o 5 6o-H-0 o1-o 7 8 o-11-o ~l-0

I

2

3

4

5 6

7 8 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

of unworkable and correct arrangement

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW CONTACTS HANDLE END 8 7

ol--0--I

~k)

~l-o-1

1-o-11-0

I

4 X X 5X

8

6 5 4

X

X

X X

3

X

X Fig 6 Contact arrangement to meet cam limitations

CONTACTS HANDLE END

I 2 0-11-0 rH-o

1~4o-1 ~ 5 o-r- __1ry

I~ ao-1 o-j~

I

2 3

4

5

7

8

45-degree slip action of cam Fig 8 Breaker control switch model 16SB182

( INCORRECT l

3 3N

I 2 11 ~1--o o-U-o 12

(CORRECT)

I 2 I )gt-i l-0 0- 2

3~ f--0 0- 4 ) 4

3 3N

X X

2N

X X

2N

X X X X

2

X X

2

X X X X

I

I

X X

2 I

X

X

37

4 5

ESCUTCHEON (FRONT VIEW)

POSITIONS

Close

X

X X

X X

Norm Norm ofter ofter Trip close trip

X X

X X

X X

( INCORRECT)

2

I 2 I I o-n--o o f--0 I2

( CORRECT)

2

I 2 )(jgtmiddotH--0 0

~ 4_I f--0 o-f gt

I 2

3

4

2N

2N

X X

IN

X X

IN

X X X X

I

i X X

Limitation No 2 ( SBMS81 -9 amp -10)

contact On a 4-position pull-to-lock switch tht A contact cannot be closed in the

Limitation No 3 (SBM SB--1 -9 amp -10)

cannot be on the same stage as shown in slip contact cannot be closed in the 2N and normal after position without also closing in the top diagram 2 positions (As shown in the top diagram) the position itself as shown in the top

A stage must be added and contacts split without closing in position 1 To accomplish diagram To accomplish this a stage must be up as shown in the bottom diagram one this a stage is added and the contacts are added and the contacts set up as shown in contact per stage (Does not apply to SBM) connect in series as shown in the bottom the bottom diagram with the contacts

diagram placed in series by jumpers Jumpers required are shipped loose with the switch

17

Overlapping Contacts mediate position is identified by an degrees between positions by use of aGENERAL X in the block above this position in special cam

Contacts on Type SB switches are the operating requirement table ConshySB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHESnormally non-overlapping (breakshy tacts 1 and 2 are shown overlapping in

before-make) This sequence is the intermediate Positions 4 and 6 illustrated in Fig 10 which shows that Contact 2 is shown making in intershyContact No 1 opens before Contact mediate Position 4 before Contact 1 No 2 closes when turning from breaks when going from Position 3 Position 1 to Position 2 Another (OFF) to Position 5 (PHASE 1 ) and normal function is illustrated by Contact 1 will make before Contact 2 Contact No 3 which is shown closed breaks when going from Position 5 to in two adjacent positions (Positions 2 Position 7 and 3) When switching between these Figure 12 illustrates an ammeter positions the contact will always switch for three independent current remain closed There are some circuits transformers (similar to Model where this action is not desired such 10AA013) This switch also has overshyas switching current transformers to an lapping contacts and intermediates at ammeter Here the contacts must Positions 2 4 6 and 8 however the overlap (make-before-break) to overlapping action takes place between prevent damaging the meter the intermediate position and the

actual position The X on the lineSBM SWITCH between the positions of thl contacts

To get this overlapping action on identifies this action When turning the contacts 90 degrees between from Position 5 (PHASE I) to Position pos1t1ons is required Figure 11 7 (PHASE 11)Contact 1 makes before illustrates an ammeter switch (similar Contacts 2 and 3 break Also Contact to Model 10AA009) with overlapping 2 and 3 break before Contacts 4 and 5 contacts The overlapping action takes make and Contacts 4 and 5 make place in the intermediate positions before Contact 6 breaks All this (Positions 2 4 6 and 8) The inter- action takes place within the 90

Fg 10 Typical non-overlappingPOSITIONS HANDLE END CONTACTS

(break-before-make) sequence 3 2 I I 2 I Xo-H-o o-H-o 2 X

3 X X~1--o AMMETER

OFF

INTER POSITION

~ 7 IJltI 5 1( 3 I

3

2

AMMETER CONTACTS POSITIONS OFF ODD EVEN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

3 o-U-o o-H--o I

2 X X rx ~ X X -~-

(V 1

2 o-U--ltgt ltgt41--o

3 4 oc

kX

o-11--o ltgt41--o 5 6 x

)( ~

Kx Iv

o-0--o ltgt41--o 7

8 X gtL00 -

~-

o-11--o o-H-o 9 ex

Basically the overlapping action is the same as with the SBM switch but Iit is not limited to positions which are 90-degrees apart

To get a make-before-break action as shown in Fig 13 a minimum of 37frac12 degrees between positions is required To get a make-before-break as shown in Fig 14 a minimum of 60 degrees is required The flexibility of the SB-1 -9 and -10 switch allows the comshybination of 37frac12 degrees and 60 deshygrees in the same switch to give you an ammeter switch which reads as many as six independent current transshy -formers with either 1 or 2 0 F Fs (see Fig 15)

A special contact sequence which requires a contact to close in adjacent positions but to open momentarily between them is shown by Contact 1 in Figure 16 A minimum of 60 degrees between positions is required When less than 60 degrees is required use two contacts in parallel as shown in Fig 17

I INTER POSITION

7531 POSITIONS

ODD EVEN CONTACTS

4 3 2 I

I

8 7 6 5 X XX XX X Xo-11--0 o-H-o 2 XX X

3X XX X XX Xo-H--o o-t f-o 4X XX

sx X X X XX Xo-11--o ltgt41-o 6 X XX

Fig 11 Overlapping contacts for SBM ammeter-type switch connected at end of secondary -

Fig 12 Overlapping contacts for AMMETER POSITIONSCONTACTS SBM ammeter-type switch with three HANDLE ENO Inter Inter I3 22 3 independent circuits I X IX

2 X XX Xt~~ 3 XXH~ 4 X XX X

Fig 13 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch 18 connected at end of secondary (two current transformers)

2

Overlapping Contacts (Contd)

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE END

3 ~hgt--4~

~1--o

~~~ ~~

~hgt--4~

~rltgt

CONTACTS HANDLE END

6 2 I o-H-~

5 3 4

3~ 40- 1-o

51~ 6o-j rltgt

7 ~ 8 ~ I-ltgt

I

2

3

5

6 7

9 10

II

I

3 4

5

6 7 8

3

X

X

X X

6 5

4

6 X

X

POSITIONS

X X

XX

X X X

X

X

X X X

X

AMMETER OFF

I 2

3

2

X

X X

X

X

X X X

X

XX X X

X X

XX

I

X X

X

X

CONTACTS HANDLE END

POSITIONS

5 X

X

4

X

X

3 X

X

2 X

X

Fig 14 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with three independent circuits

I X

X

Fig 15 Overlapping contacts for SB-1 ammeter-type switch with six independent circuits

POSITIONS - BACK VIEW u

u 0

Fig 16 Special contact sequence which requires one contact to be closed in every handle position but to open momentarily when switching

Fig 17 Special contact sequence POSITION - BKVIEWCONTACTSwhich requires one contact to be

HANDLE END 876543218 2closed in every handle position but to IX XX X7 3open momentarily when switching 2X XX Xhowever when less than 60 degrees 6 4

5 X X X Xbetween positions is required two ~ontacts are connected in parallel X X X

19

To prevent operation ofequipment by unauthorized persons switches with removable handles are available The handle is keyed to a specific escutcheon to be inserted and reshymoved in a designated pos1t1on Handles can also be mutually keyed to other escutcheons so that they are either interchangeable or non-intershychangeable with other switches

This feature is available for SBM SB-1 and SB-9 switches but ordering procedures differ

SBM SWITCHES

0 3 0

5I 0 6 0 7 0

Fig 18 SBM switch keyed escutchshyeon with eight available keyway locashytions Keyways 1-3-5 are shown

The keyed escutcheon on the SBM switch ( Fig 18) has eight possible keyway locations Three are normally used and are assigned by the factory The choice is influenced by several factors

a If the handle is to be intershychangeable with that of another switch the position in which each handle is to be removeable must be considered

b If the handle is to be non-intershychangeable the keyways assigned to other removeable handles in the same panel must be considered

c If no special instruction is given by the customer when he orders the factory will assign keyways at random if more than one SBM switch has a removable handle they will be keyed to be non-interchangeable

A removable handle is furnished as a separate item not with the switch it operates because in some cases the single handle operates many switches The handle is keyed so that it will fit through the keyways on the escutcheon in a specific position

When ordering a removable handle specify the type the position in which it is to be removable and the switch or switches it will be used with The factory will assign the handle To

Removable Handles TABLE 1 Nomenclature guide for SBM removable handles

1st 2nd 5th Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Letter LetterNumber NoNo No

Action ofRemovable Common Escutcheon Type Handle

Rotation Keywaysin Position Code

W=CWampCCW 11 = Knurled 1 w 1 1

L = CCW (special) thru thru thru2 = Oval thru

R = CW (special) 8 grip

3 = Pistol 8 88

Example 1 21WW135

This oval handle has keys at positioos which when it is in position 1 or nine oclock will line up with escutcheon keyways 1 3 and 5 It is therefore removable in position 1

identify SBM removable handles see Table 1

SB-1 amp SB-9 SWITCH

The keyed escutcheon for the SB-1 amp

SB-9 switch is normally furnished with two keys and three keyways (see Fig 19) The circumferential location of the keys and keyways will vary depending on the location etc in which the handle is to be removable The location of the keyways is assigned by the factory

Table 2 gives a list of standard keyed escutcheons and the proper removable handle for removing the handle in both the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and 90deg ccw (9 oclock) pos1t1on Escutcheons 6016164P-2 thru P-14 are used on switches if the throw does not exceed 90deg on either side of the vertical ( 12 oclock) position and P-23 24 and 25 are used when the throw does exceed this limit

0

Fig 19 SB-1 escutcheon for use with removable handle

-

-Oval handles 16S81CC1 thru 32 are

listed with direction and degree of throw from the positions in which they are removable The code letters A thru Z in the left hand column identify the escutcheons used on the basic unlisted switches

I Example 16S81AB300S~M3Y the 2nd form letter ~ identifies a keyed escutcheon 6016164P 3

When a special keyed escutcheon is required different from any of those listed the code letter X is used followed by the part number

Example 16S81AB300SX34M2Y

All keyed escutcheons will now have the part number stamped at the bottom left hand corner instead of the code letters previously stamped at the bottom righthand corner If the code letter or other indentification is deshy -sired it will be stamped at the bottom righthand corner by requisition only (three characters maximum) The 16S81CC oval type removable handle will now have the form number only stamped on the lower face of the handle Those removable handles which have metal shanks (6119745G) will have the group number stamped on the shank When a switch with a Ikeyed escutcheon for a removable handle is ordered be sure to specify the position in which the handle is to be removable If an existing handle will be used give the number of the existing handle

20

Removable Handles (Contd)

I TABLE 2

Model Number

Code Escutcheonbull Handle Throw

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

I

A 6016164P3 16S81CC1 A 3 CC18

B 4 CC2 4 CC19

C

B

5 CC3 5 CC15

D

C

6 CC4 D 6 CC11 D 6 CC22 D 6 CC27

E 7 CC5 7 CC12E

E 7 CC13 7E C20 7E CC25

F 8 CC6 F -8 CC14 F CC248

CC7G 9 G 9 CC8

CC17G 9 G 9 CC26 G 9 CC29

9 CC21

H

G

10 CC23 H 10 CC9 H 10 CC10

10H CC31 10H CC32

J 23 CC18

y 24 CC19

z 25 CC21

Handle Removable 90deg CCW

K 6016164P11 16S81CC1 K 11 CC18

L 12 CC2 12L CC15

M 13 CC3 13M CC15

N 14 CC11 N 14 CC27

14N CC4 14N CC22

SpecialX

135deg cw 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 45degCW amp ccw 45degCCW 360deg

45 cw 75degCW 45degCWamp ccw 360deg 75degCCW

45degCW 45degcw amp ccw 36QO

Type SB-1 and SB-945deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng 45degccw 135deg CCW 45degCW 360deg OFF

360deg 45deg CW I Eng 45deg CCW R Eng

1

)j~bullbullo+ 45degCW 45deg ccw

I 360deg

360deg

360deg

135degCW 360deg

135degCW 360deg

135deg cw 360deg

45degCW amp ccw 360deg 135deg cw 45degCCW

The P number (3 4 etc) is used as the part Fig 20 Typical removable handles number in the text and escutcheons

21

I

Temperature-Meter Switches

Temperature-meter switches are Fig 21 shows a temperature-meter circuit with a TEST and an OFF furnished with palladium contacts switch Model 16SB 1 CE52 reading position On a three-wire circuit you which have a constant resistance factor This is necessary because calibrated leads are normally used in a temperature-meter circuit and silver contacts would result in a variable resistance factor and cause fluctuation in meter readings

TEST METER Off ~

~ jQr

Ii-2

four RTDs on a two-wire circuit with a TEST and an OFF position On a two-wire circuit you can transfer up to seven coils with an OFF position or six coils with a TEST and an OFF position

Fig 22 shows a Model 16SB1CE55 reading three RTDs

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS TWO WI RES TO FOUR COILS WITH TEST a OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE52

POSITIONSCONTACTS HANDLE END GI Ill =-C

I-4 i ICs co~ 2~ -

I I X o~ ~~ 2 X

43 3 X XX l-0~ r - 4 X X X

55 Xo-H-~ 6

6-- 1-o X 7 X X X1~LJ 8l-0o-1 r 8 X X X

~ 9 XI 109 II - 1-o 10 X II X X XI 12II

o-i - ~ 12 X XX 115 V A-C SOURCE

X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C B

4 3 2 DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 21 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE52

on a three-wire

TEST METER Off ~

~

can transfer up to six coils with an OFF position or five coils with a TEST and an OFF position When it is required to transfer more RTDs than the maximum for a given switch two switches with a removable handle may be used

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSFER SWITCH

TRANSFERS THREE WIRES TO THREE COILS WITH TEST 8 OFF

MODEL NO 16SBICE55

POSITIONSCONTACTS - 3

- Ill

pound CU

0HANDLE ENO - iC 2 c cl C Ci i I 2 I X 0-1-0-11-0 2 X 3 4 3 X X X 0-l-0-if-0 4 X XX 5 6 5 XX X ltgt-it-o-lrO 6 XX X 7 8 7 Xo-H-ltgt-Hmiddoto 8 X 9 10 9 X XX o-l~r-6 10 X X X II 12 II XX Xo-lkgt-1~ 12 X XX

115 V A-C SOURCE X y

FUSES

TEST RESISTOR

C

3 2 I DETECTOR COILS IN MACHINE

Fig 22 Temperature meter switch Model 16S81CE55

I

22

Outline Dimensions Type SBM Control and Transfer Switches

Hgndi11

li7bull

1-8

Standard ____ Oval SwitchNoof

Stages A B

gbull2

16 1 31 21e 2 4frac12 2v 3 51e 21e

4 51 2v 5 6frac34 2v 6 7 21a

7 7 2v 8 8frac14 21 9 8frac12 2v

10 91a 2v

Knurled

f28

Lever

SHIPPING WEIGHTS

When panel is 1bullthick -add l2to A and B dimensions

Pull-to-Lock Removable Switch Handle Switch

A B A BI I

4) 211 4frac34 3) SJ 27e 5o 3) 5frac34 21a 6 3)

6 271 65a 3) 7) 21 7frac14 3) 7frac126 21o 77e 3)

8) 211 8frac12 3) 8) 21o 91 3) 8frac34 211 91 9) 9 211 9frac34 3)

Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SBM (1 Stage) 1frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

23

---- --- --- --- ---

Outline Dimensions ccoNTgt

Type SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only) Panel

311

~lt-- Handles 1321--t 1 f-- frac12 drill (3 holes)

T ~~cutcheonmiddotf -~-middot- l--r11

3_] aI 132

-A-_j - 8 -- To1

I Oval I

I I

I I

No of

Stages

Radial

Round 12-8

Ti 1 514 2s 6

7

B

9

10

11

12

13 Locked

14handle

4 15

16

remove cover

SB-1 switch with fixed handles (Outline 116A 130)

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover

Standard Cover 12 Wires Out Top

and 24 Wires Out Bottom

A I B

5 1316 10116

11 16 20 156

11 136 22 716

13 frac126 25 76

14 1316 28 76

I C

4 frac12

Lorge Cover

Large Cover 24 Wires Out Top

and Bottom

6 116 10 116

4 1116

10 916 19 1116

11frac126 21 316

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-1 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-1 (1 Stage) 2 lb (This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I

24

-----

-----

----------

-----

-----

------

-----

---------

---------

---

---

------

---

---

---

---

---

------

------

---

---

---

---

---------------------

---

I

-

No of Stages

I 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16-

Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-9 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel-mounted Type SB-9 switch (Outline 116A139)

PANEL-MOUNTED TYPE SB-9 Dimension ir Inches

Standard Cover 12 Wires out Top and 24 Wires out Bottom

A 8 CI I

41a

51a

61a

71 -~--

71

81a

91a

101a

101e

111a

121a

131a

131e

141a

151o

161

83a

91a

111a

121

141

151e

171

181a

201a

middot211a

231a

241e

261

271e

291a

301e

4frac12

Lorge Cover 24 Wires out

Top and Bottom

A 8 CI I

51a

51

61a

71

81a

81a

91a

10

111a

111e

121a

131a

141a

141e

151a

16 lo

8frac14

101

111a

131a

14frac14

161

17frac14

191a 4l5Ji6

201a

221a

23frac14

251

261a

281a

291a

311a

For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position add frac34 to A and 1frac12 to B When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position add 1frac12 to A and 3 to B

Note Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and availshyable in all styles except radial and locked They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to SB-9

- switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-9 (1 Stage) 3 lb

25

-----

------

----------------

I Outline Dimensions ccoNT)

Type SB-10 Control and Transfer Switches

(For estimating only)

Panel

bull ICx2 16 wide

11or8

n3

-----A----- Panel Ori I ling ---B to Remove Cover (front view)

No of Stoges

1

2t

3t

4t

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Panel-mounted Type SBmiddot10 switch

Dimension in Inches

Standard Cover Large Cover

A B C A B CI I I I I 6frac34

6frac34

7frac12

8frac14

9

9frac34

10frac12

11frac14

12

12frac34

13frac12

Ufrac14

12frac12

12frac12

14

15frac12

17

18frac12

20

21frac12

23

24frac12

26

27frac12

4frac12

12frac347

7 12frac34

7frac34 14frac14

8frac12 15frac34

9frac14 17frac14

10 18frac34 4 15i6

10frac34 20frac14

11frac12 21frac34

12frac14 23frac14

13 24frac34

13frac34 26frac14

14frac12 27frac34

bull Includes both lateral and rotary stages

(Outline 0l65A6122)

SHIPPING WEIGHTS Approx weights are listed below All weights listed apply to Type SB-10 switches consisting of one stage Add 6 ounces for each additional stage

Type SB-10 (1 Stage) 3frac12 lb

(This data is subject to change without notice)

I

I 26

I

-

- ADD 14 TO A amp B DIM

FOR LARGE COVER

NOOF STAGES A B

1 5-116 7-7 16

2 5-1316 8-1516

3 6-916 10-716 - 4 7-516 11-1516

5 8-1 16 13-716

6 8-1316 14-1516

7 9-916 16-716

8 10-516 17-1516

9 11-1 16 19-716

10 11-1316 20-1516

11 12-916 22-716

12 13-516 23-1516

13 14-116 25-716

14 14-1316 26-1516- 15 15-916 28-716

Tandem Switch Outlines

PANEL

frac121 il 11 F--~--F-----F ----A~

B TO REMOVEOUTLINE COVER

NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

i---------c-------i PANEL

TWO SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

THREE SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

FOUR SWITCH TANDEM SB-1

Gear-operated (360deg rotation)

DRILLING -

C

7-12

11

14-1 2

D

2

5-12

5-1 2

FRONT

E

8-14

11-34

15-1 4

VIEW

F G

3-1 2

a w gta3-12 0w ugt w0 ()u aI ltI Ilt a~

() 0 ua

03-1 2 u ~

N

(This data is subject to change without notice)16 16-516 29-1516

Fig 23 Tandem-switch outline 27

Outline Dimensions for Locked Handle Switches

3116 DI A--- + -r--------

~ 1gttl~1

f DIA--1-4-----fyen-l 3

t 32-rDIA(3l___ PANEL DRILLING (FRONT VIEW)

l middotcbullx2 1

16

WIDE

t~omiddot--1 32 FOR frac14-ifrac14 PANEL

~ FOR I a 2 PANEL

~ FOR 1-t PA~~~-----~

~18

11 TO REMOVE COVER

SB-switch with Yale Lock above the switch ForA and B use standard dimensions plus D depending on panel thickness

SB-9 SWITCHES

STANDARD DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

STANDARD COVER 12 WIRES OUT TOP LARGE COVER

NOOF AND 24WIRES 24WIRES OUT STAGES OUT BOTTOM TOP AND BOTTOM

A B C A B C

1 4-78 8-38 5middot18 8-58

2 5-58 9middot78 5middot78 10middot18

3 6-38 11-38 6-58 11-58

4 7-18 12-78 7middot38 13middot18

5 7-78 14-38 8-18 14-58

6 8-38 15-78 8middot78 16middot1 8

7 9-38 17-38 9-58 17-58

8 10-1 8 18-78 10-38 19middot1 8 4 12 4 15169 10-78 20-38 11-18 20-58

10 11-58 21-78 11-78 22-18

11 12-38 22-38 12-58 23-58

12 13-1 8 24middot78 13middot38 25-1 8

13 13-78 26-38 14middot1 8 2amp58

14 14-58 27-78 14-78 28-1 8

15 15-38 29-38 15middot58 29-58-16 16-18 30middot78 16middot38 31-18

(This data is subject to change without notice)

28 Fig 24 Dimensions control switches with Yale or Kirk Lock

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

-I VOLTMETER Source Voltmeter

POSITIONS Fig 25 VOLTMETER SWITCH OFF

0-idouble-pole single-throw ON OFF0Model No IOAAOOI 2X

XKnurled handle

VoltmeterVOLTMETER ~ONTACTI POSITIONSHANDLE - OFF ENDFig 26 VOLTMETER SWITCH ltgt I-

0 double-pole double-throw

2 l5 I ~cModel No 10AA002 2

ltgtl~fo I X 2 XKnurled handle

3 43 Xltgtl~fo14 X

VOLTMETER ONTACTI POSITIONSFig 27 VOLTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE N 3 2 I2 ENDSWITCH three-phase

J -transfers lour wires -shy 8Jffic 3 2 lo- 0

I phase-to-neutral 0 IXltgt1tpifo I XModel No 10AA003

3 Xltgtl~ltgtifoKnurled handle 14 IY IX

VOLTMETER tONTACT5 HANDLEFig 28 VOLTMETER SWITCH

END1 2-3

JPhase-to-phase or _ N-cjffi-phase-to-neutral l)N - Move this-08 c0- jumper0 I X IXModeNo 10AA004 3-phose 3-wirP to 1-2 whenrot xx

connectingKnurled handle 3 X switch 3 ltjgt4w~~ 4 X 3-phose 4-wire (future

alternate connection)

Ivo mete I VOLTMETER ~ONTACTI

HANDLE 4 3 2 I 2 END I ~o 2 6I J u

ucJffiFig 29 VOLTMETER SWITCH 8 c 2 I 04 3OFF 0 4 I- n 4 3Xfour circuits two wires Iltgtl~fo~ XModel No 10AA005 IIX - 5 dltgtI~- 4 -

IX I f6Knurled handle X Iltgtiffdeglo ~ h7 8X IX7ltgti~lo 8 X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

29

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION

VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase transshy

fers four wires phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral

Model No I 0AA006

Knurled handle

Fig 30

Fig 31 VOLTMETER SWITCH two

three-phase three-wire

circuits Model No 10AA007

Knurled handle

Fig 32 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three CTs (connect at

end of secondary I

Model No I 0AA00B

Knurled handle

Fig 33 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three Cls with off

connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA009

Knurled handle

Fig 34 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No I 0AA01 0

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAM

VOLTMETER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF

lt ENO u u~las(J 0 3 2 lo

X

8~ ~tooj

XXX OFF 5 X ~~ X~tooj

VOLTMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO _ Ibull u

8~ I uI Ilas N-o I~tooj 3~iltOI 14 5 XX~ool 6 xx

_ NU

I I I U N-o X X

IX X

X X

_ -I I I-N -0

IXX xx X

X

7 IX~ool 8 X

AMMETER lONTACT HANDLE

ENO2

las8i0 XXIpf~ 2 I~ XX

~~ X14

-X X

X X X X

XX XX X X

i6 5 ioi

XX

AMMETER CONTACT HANDLE

OFF ENO

JINsectI~ 0 - -XX XXXr-iteol XX

XX 2

X XXHi6oi XX X X XX XX1-itltgti XX X

AMMETER ~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO2

I8 asc

u

~ xx X XX

XX

-0 XX XI X XX XX

H~ XX XX~ 14 XX X

XX X5 ~~ X X X X X X XX6 r X XX X XX IX XH~ I XX

WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Source 3 2 I

Source 3 2 I

3 2

9 XXHfltgt ~

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

30

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

- DESCRIPTION

Fig 35 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No I 0AA0I I

Knurled handle

-AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two CTs with off

(connect al end of secondary

Model No I0AA012

Fig 36

Knurled handle

I Fig 37 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 10AA013

Knurled handle

Fig 38 AMMETER-VOLTMETER -TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wires phase-toshyphase plus three independent current transformer circuits

Model No I0AA014

Knurled handle

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

AMMETER toNTAC~ HANDLE

2 END

lz lN bull-8~0 I XX

lliltgt1 ) X X X X ~ X X gti~ 14 XX X X

AMMETER CONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 018 i5

i N - trltl 0 I XX X XX~tobi ) X X X XX ~ IX

2 XX X XgtI~ 4 X X X XX

AMMETER tONTAC~ HANDLE

ENDOFF lOli5 lN8 irltl O - ill -

X X X XX XXXX X X ~fool2 X X X X X XgtiiSol X X X

X XXlgtitltSoi XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XtilltRgti XX X XX XOjfo H-___

AMMETER ~ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLE

OFF END

lO~1i58 irltl 0 lI2I IY

l3 lIY IY IY

xxxx xxlltltloito i2 X xx XXX2 oitloi11~ XXX

ltgtitoolI 5 X xx 6 X xx XX X XX X 7

xx X X XIX XIX XIX XXXlltloito A X xx

QI xxoi1o II Xli fool~ IX12

XIX xxx11oi1oltgt1~ Iti XIX XXX

WIRING DIAGRAM

Source 3 2

Source 3 2

3 2

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

31

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION___________________ESClJTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

-

Fig 39 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four wires phase-toshy

neulral plus three independshy

ent current transformer circuits

ModeNo I0AA015

Knurled handle

Fig 40 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three wires

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

connect al end of secondary)

Model No 10AA016

Knurled handle

Fig 41 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase four wires

phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 10AA0 I 7

Knurled handle

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

AMMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

0

2

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

8~i5 litooito

61~l

ltgtI~~

9lt6ofto

bilo~to I

oi~lol IX I2 IX

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

i58~ 3 2 I I XI~ X xx~t6o

~t6o II

lrH1 1Mt6ofbull1 I

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

Ji58~ ~~

~~

4~

ltgtitfiio

oiigt r

u u

lO ~ 0I XIX

2 xx IX IX ~ IX XX) XX~

IX XX XXX X

X xx IX X

xx xx XXX XXX

xx xxxx xx XIX XIX

IX

u u

o xx

2 XXX1x1x1x13 X XIX~t6o XXX14

5 X xx xx xx X xx

IX IX

X XX

X X

u u

l(O2 llf I3x

IX IX X

XXX XIX) X xx

IX X xx xx xx XXX

X X

X I

N321

32 I

N 3 2 I

Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Voltmeter ti Ammeter

2

4

6

8

Voltmeter

--------+----------If---------u

middot= i -+ D ~u -+-BREAKER CONTROL

Fig 42 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1OAA100

Pistol-grip handle --+----++--~---- +Fuse ---4----++--------~~------ or

y

---+-~T-ri--p-p-ng~b-us- +Operating bus+c ------- y

-----------------------------------------------ti ~ in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

32

X

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

NO ~ DESCRIPTl0N ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACli DIAGRAM

c u - ~ ~

c ~ -~BREAKER CONTROL ~I~ ~6 ~ 0CONTACTS aa -+ 0 ~u -+- a 0 0 u - HANDLE t

01~ END -laquo ~

i I 0

0 8 c ~ ~~Fig 43 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL X

SWITCH ltgtI tor to X X XModel No 10AA101 ~~to Bell

Pistol-grip handle X

XX -t+++-t------++-+ X o~ +-++-=cc_cc_-+ - or y

~~-IIltgt 7 XX -++--+=--~----+-+8 xx

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE

J ltlENDFig 44 TRIP SWITCH a_a

contacts normally open ao01~8 c gt-Z Model No 1OAA102

f-ltuj I X 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

I BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS

HANDLE END

J

Fig 45 TRIP SWITCH =acontacts normally closed 01~ ao8 c gt-Z

Model No 1OAA103 X~ I 2 XPistol-grip handle

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL

1+ Trip coillFig 46 Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH for operating Trip coil4two breakers

Model No 1OAA104 Closing coil 5 Closing coil6

J ti2

Pistol-grip handle

Con tac tor BREAKER CONTROL coil~ONTACTS

HANDLE ENO wlaquo

J

Fig 47 SWITCH SUBSTITUTE sectff-~~~ ~oafor push-button station c vZgt-

~~i I X X Model No I 0AA 105 2 X X

Pistol-grip handle 3 X~i

Spring return

x in oll contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

33

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM~--------------------

Fig 48 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I 0AA I 06

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS O

HANDLE g~ ENO ~ ~

~I~ ~~Cl

811 dsectsect~

Spring return

Fig 49 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I0AAl07

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE J

-E~N=-0-Vli Cl

sl~ g~ Spring return

Fig 50 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AAI0B

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CON IROL ONTACTS ~ i HANDLE ~ ~

ENO ~ ~

sl~ J ~lltgtoiio I X

2 X

Spring return

Fig 51 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No I0AA109

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~ ~ HANDLE

ENO $S 01~ ~2ECl

811 ~Hr~

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM I t

Fig 52 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No 10AA 110

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

~~1ltgtmiddotmicrobull4-x~x~xe+--1-----~ I Spring return

Fig 53 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I0AA 111

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

lt DC

lto ~ ~lt

0 I filitltgtHc+xc+--+-x+------i

~1ltgt~ltgtif--+x+x+-1-----~XX

Sprinq return

Fig 54 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH Model No 10AA 112

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

XX~1ltgt~1ltgtmiddot~1stt+x+-xt-----~ Sprinq return

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

34

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGBAIVI DESClUPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM-------~~~ -

Fig 55 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL - CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLSWITCH Fig 58 Model No 1OAA11 3 SWITCH

Pistol-grip handle Mode No 1 OAA 116

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER O)NTROL 9 ~NTACTS ulHANDLE BREAKER CONTROL IdCONTACTSD ENDq (lto ~n HANDLE 8 J

__~ S~ O END 12~~I Cltoli5 ~s~8 i z Q J0 -lt s~ ~s l X p~sectI~ltgtltoltgti PULL 0X

XTO LOCKX ltgtltoltgtijoX XXltgtI toltgtI Iltgt X XX XXX X ltgtltoltgtljo xx XXltgtltoltgtifo XX XXxx ltgtI toltgtI fo xx- Ptoltgtifo xx Spring returnxx

P1ltgtltgt11ltgt1 JXX SpnnQ return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 59 SWITCHFig 56 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Model No 1 OAA 1 1 7

SWITCH Pistol-grip handle

Mode No 1OAA114

Pistol-grip hondle BREAKER O)NTR0L CtoNTACTS ul u

HANDLE 15 lli 0 J

BREAKER CONTROL ~ONTACTS u END $5 12 D ltHANDLE g -lt qs-e ~s rJ - J0END gwlaquo sectI~ 3 QPULL 0u

oo1~j XTO LOCKQ 0 ltgtlfltgtoi-I i5 XX8 i QuzPULL 0 XXXXITO LOCK ltgtI toltgtljo X

ltgtltoltgtI jo X 3 2 X

XX ~toltgtI

X XX ltgtI toltgtI fo XX4 XX Spring return ltgtltoltgtijo XX

XX pring return

Fig 57 Fig 60 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCHSWITCH

Mode No I OAA 11 8Model No 1OAA 11 5

Pistol-grip handlePistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL 9~toNTACTS Ugt-- uHANDLE 9~~ ENO I O ltocs D (lto w~a g -lt s-e__~ s~ ll Q Ja1d - PULL 0PULL 0 sl~ ~efi

J

TO LOCKXTO LOCK o-toltgti XX XX XX lltgtiiootX XX XX X X

ltgtlfooljo X X XX

XX ltgtlloltgtifo XXlo-ioltgti XX XXlgttoolspring return XX

prinQ return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

35

------

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-

Fig 61 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL Fig 64 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 119 Model No 10AA122

Pistol-grip handle Pistol-grip handle

ooBREAKER CONTROL BREAKER CONTROLCONTACTS ud~ CONTACTS a~ gHANDLE 5 ~HANDLE ~~tt0 fENO 0 ENO~DC _lt- clos1 sect2 ~ (os 2 Q _J2i~g lt ~ 0

8~ - _J_J 01i5 _J i 0 asectI~ ~ Q PULL 0 z QzPULL 0

XmiddotTO LOCK XTO LOCKltgttooito 1togtitoXX XX XX X X XX X X11ltgt1to ltgtlltgtotoXX XX

X X X X ioitooi ltgttooiloX XX XX XXltgttooito XX 0 0degoifo I xx SpnnQ return prin return

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 65 SWITCHCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 62

SWITCH Model No 1 OAA 123

Model No 1 OAA 120 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS ~~ g oeBREAKER CONTROL j0 u HANDLECONTACTS _Jw~v~ ~~ 9HANDLE ENO IWW

5 deg 0 ()IENO 2 Q _J~ D $ Co 0 -~

2 Q _J~ 0I i5c Q0 - _J 8~PULL 0 1dsect0 a_Jli5 u

Xz Q8~ TO LOCKPULL 0 oitooi X XXTO LOCK lltgtilltgtoilltgt X X X XX X otoltgtIltgt X XXXX Xfoltoltgtlo X X XX 1toollo XXXX

1-itoollo X X XX oltoollo XXX Xltgttooilltgt I XXXX ltgtltoltgtto I XXSpring return

Spring return

Cl RCU IT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 66CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 63 SWITCHSWITCH Model No 1 OAA 124

Model No 1 OAA 121 Pistol-grip handle

Pistol-grip handle

oe02 BREAKER CONTROLBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTSjo u d~ uCONTACTS v~ 0 g_J HANDLE liHANDLE 0 t tD END IEND t ~ ~ D clt ~~ Qo()_lt Q _J~ I 2Q _J -lt s~ - _J0 IOJlt a -sect 0sectI~li5 Qdsect 2ccI- 5 PULL 0Q8~PULL 0

XTO LOCKI XTO LOCK ltgttooi1to-gtito X2

1 X

X XX X rgtitooi11oltgtilltgt XX X X XX

XX XX X5 X otlooiloltgtltoltgtito XXX X 6

XXXX7 loioololtgtfool XX8 XX XXSpring return follooito I xx 5pr1n re urn

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

36

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

I Fig 67 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two current coils

Model No 10AA018

Knurled handle

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 68 SWITCH three current coils

Model No 10AA019 Knurled handle

I

WATTMETER TRANSFERFig 69 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 1 0AA020

Knurled handle

Fig 70 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 10AA021 Knurled handle

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

1-0 i0 z I

I Joi lo 2 ~

biiltgto 4 5ltgtI~ 6

WATTMETER ONTACTS HANDLEOFF ENO

0 rnrn-i0 z IliOltgtli Z ~

IIltgt 4 5

ol ifdeg 6 7~inllltgt R q

Iiiltgt

WATT METER

OFF

0 0 z

PF SWITCH ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF END

01~0 8 i0 z Il~Iltgt Z

LL Z LLoo

XX X X XX XX XX

XX

LL

~~ xx

X X XX XX XX

XX XX

X X XX

LL

5~ xx

X X

Source 3 2

Source 3 2 I

Current Potential Coils Coils

Source 3 2

~ XX ltgtltIltgt

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

37

---

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

_____D_Es_c_R_1PT_1o_N__$ -1---E_sc_u_r_c_HE_o_N_amp_co_NT_A_cr_o_1_AG __ _____w_1_R1_NG_o_1A_G_RA_M______I__RA_M

POWER-FACTOR SWITCH oneFig 71 current and two potential coils

ModeNo I0AA022

Knurled handle

Fig 72 POWER-FACTOR OR WATTshy

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No I 0AA023

Knurled handle

Fig 73 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT

MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA066

Lever handle

Fig 14 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No I 0AA067

Pistol-grip handle

p F METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

OFF END 11 z ~1~0 I~8 G OJ( O0 z

I xx~r 2 XX

XXbqo~to

OifoltgtHbull 5 X X6 XX

WATT METER 0NTACTS HANDLE

END

3 IX-~IOiomicrol44-X+-l-+--------I

GOVERNOP 0NTACTI HANDLE

END kt ~---1~1 1

q~ ~~~ 8ic JZCl

deg 1 X

I X

Spring return

MOTOR CONTROL

I I n l w Current~n--Li 3

I

Coll

~~t---6 Potential Coils

n_i-0 5 l s y n I

0

I

-Potontial Coils of wattmeter

AutoTrans--ltgt n 2--PotTrans

Pol Trans- 3 4--Auto Trans

5 rr-~----_-AutaTrons-f-07 gt6 IAltgt--+--PotTrans

Potential Coils of Wattmeter

I lomot r=

switch r I IO 02 Lower

3o ~-= Umlt ~-Qi ( ~G

switch -~ ~ ~ + Rose ~ -L1m1t switch Split field 1

lomt ~Roise2 + Seoes motorImotor

SWtlCh Lower 4 - Jumpers shown dotted3

furnished with switch6 To be removed for

Limt 7 8 ths hook- up switch Ro1sf

Shunt motor

-3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

38

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

__bull____DE_s_c_R_tP_T_IO_N__-1--Es_c_u_T_C_HE_O_N_+amp_C_O_NT_A_c_T_D_IA_G_RA_M__-tmiddot------w_t_R_tN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M____~

I

I

SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

machine-to-bus

with interlocks

Model No 1 OAA 024

Fig 75

Uses removable oval handle

23WW145 bull

Fig 16 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

running and incoming

ModeNo 10AA025

Uses one each removable

oval handle

R = 23WL235 bull

I= 23WR235 bull

Fig 77 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH

between machines without

potential transformers

Model No 10AA026

Uses removable oval handle

23WW123bull

Fig 78 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Model No 1OAA065

Pistol-grip handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS HANDLE

ENDOFF 01 u z uI~8 G oo0

I Ioi1ooiro 2 X

31)ot iootro14 1

SYNCHRONIZING

OFF ~ -I

0

SYNCHRONIZING] ONTAC~ HANDLE

END z ltf -

0 1lz I ltDR8~

I X~r X ltgtltni ~ X

Ill~ 4

MOTOR CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

-END Clltfw

~~~ 15~~sl~

I Xloi~ 2 X Spring return

2-+-+---+-----------31-+~--+-+----------

----------------2-+--------------++--3-+-h-------------++--

1-----------------+-2-+--------------+--3 -+-h----------------1+

Limit switch 11 +Lower

0

Limit switch 11

Raise11

split ferd motor

39

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

Fig 79 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA027

With spring return

Model No 10AA028

Oval handle

OFF Q 11

0

THREE- OR FOUR-POLE Fig 80 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA029

With spring return_

Model No 10AA030

Oval handle

CONTACTS HANDLE

END OFF Q -

3 -0 1 0sl~ I Xoft- Z X 3 X

ioftoI 14 X

FIVE- OR SIX-POLEFig 81 single-throw maintain contact

Model No 10AA031

With spring return

Model No 10AA032

Oval handle

OFF Qz_

0

B SEVEN- OR EIGHTshyPOLE single-throw maintained Model No 10AA033 With spring return Model No 10AA034

CONTACT5 HANDLE

END

01i58~ bullHbullltgtito

ltgtilltgtol

ltgtiloolio

zt 0

X X X

X X X

C NINE-OATEN-POLE D ELEVEN- OR single-throw maintained TWELVE-POLE singleshyModel No 10AA035 throw maintained With spring return Model No 10AA0037 Model No 10AA036 With spring return

Model No 10AA038

SINGLE-POLE doubleshy

Fig 82 throw with off maintain contact

Model No 1 0AA039

With spring return

Model No 10AA040

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

END OFF 2 -

-NO-

I

sl~0 X

oft6lgtifo 12 X

DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Fig 83 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA041

With spring return

Model No 10AA042

Oval handle

OFFlt

0

THREE-POLE double-throw Fig 84 with off maintain contact

Model No 10AA068

With spring return

Model No 10AA043

Oval handle

OFF 2

0

B FOUR-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA044 With spring return Model No 10AA045

~TACTS HANDLE

END -I

NO-sl~ I Xolpoundj 2 X I XPtooi

~TACTS HANDLE

END

sl~ ltgtil6bifo

il6gtito

ltgtil6bllo ~

I

14 X

-I

NO-

X

X

X

X

X

X

C FIVE-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA046 With spring return Model No 10AA047

D SIX-POLE doubleshythrow with off maintained Model No 10AA048 With spring return Model No 10AA049

x in oil contact diagrams denotes confects closed

I

I

40

--

Contact 1Diagrams for SBM Switch

Fig 85 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAAOSO

Oval handle

~NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

li5 N-8 Gi0 I

ol~ ~

Fig 86 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw

Model No 10AA051

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END lt

0 018 i5

Gi Iltgtl~jo 2 3

ltgtl~lo 14

Fig 87 THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 1OAA052

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

lt I8 i5Gi0 Iloi~i 2 3

Oifbb1 4

fllltfbljo 5 n X

B FOUR-POLE double-throw Model No 1QAA053

C FIVE-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA054

X X

N-

X X

X X

N-

X X

X X

X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

D SIX-POLE double-throw Model No I 0AA055

E SEVEN-POLE double-throw Model No I QAA056

SINGLE-POLE three-throw maintain contact Fig 88 Model No 1QAA057

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 2 J 0115

CN-8 Gi Oil-6gtjjo I

0 X

2 X 3 Xpile

~

SINGLE-POLE four-throwFig 89 Model No 10AAQ58

Oval handle

3

i-ONTACTSHANDLE

ENO

I 8 i51 N- X

loi~i~ X X3

IOi~lo 4 X

Fig 90 SINGLE-POLE five-throw maintain contact Model No 1OAA059

Oval handle

i-ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO 1 3 fl Wf~

-N-- 0 (JI 1 XOi~i

X XOi~lo X

Xltgtiiltgt

41

I

Contact Diagrams for SBM Switch

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAG~--------------

SINGLE-POLE six-throwFig 91 Model No 1 0AA060

Oval handle

kONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj N-

I Xoi~lo 2 X

Xloitolgtito ~ X

5 Xltgt116bito i c X

Fig 92

Fig 93

Fig 94 DOUBLE-POLE four-throw

Model No I 0AA063

Oval handle

3

tONTACTS HANDLE

END-~Gi oltampbj

oijolgtjto-bjjolgtjfoll

loitampgtifol I

1N-17

X X

X X

X X

X X

SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1 0AA061

Oval handle

tONTACTS HANDLE

END

N-rnrn -Gi Xoifolgtjlo6 5 i X

Xfol tolgtito X Xloi~to Fig 95 DOUBLE-POLE eight-throw

X X

Model No 1 0AA064ltgtIto

Oval handle

t(JNTACTIHANDLE

END

SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No I0AA062

Oval handle

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

~8 Gj

loitltgtoito

pildoito

loi ldoi to

ol tampgtito

X X

X X

X

X

N-

X X

~ I s

I- 0 (gtI sectI~ deg M-

6 5

I XltgtI fool tomiddotHcH--IH-+-+x4-IH-+---i12

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

42

I

I

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____o_E_sc_R_I_PT_I_O_N__--1--_E_s_cu_r_c_H_E_O_N_amp_CO_NT_A_C_T_D_IA_G_RAM_--11--------W_I_R_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M______

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 96 double-pole single-throw

Model No 16581 CA I

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER I ONTACTS HANDLE

OFF

LJ END

loJZ-81~

Ip-Kgtltgt 2

I SourceI I Voltmeter I

5t00 XI 2 XI

VOLTMETER SWITCH - ig 97

double-pole double-throw

Mode No I 6S81CE27

Knurled handle

VOLTMETER SWITCH Fig 98 phase-to-phase or

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI I

Knurled handle

Fig 99 VOLTMETER SWITCH threeshy

phase phase-to-phase

phase-to-neutral

Model No 16S81 CFI 6

Knurled handle

Fig 100 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three-phase

four wires phase-to-neutral

Mode No 16S8 I CF22

Knurlltd handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

VOLTMETER (ONTACTHANDLE

END I N-

I I Ui58 i 32 I N-0

ltgtI X xx middotmiddot-I gtI~1-0-1 4 xx

xx Xfrac121o ~ X

7 X X~

VOLTMETER ONTACTI HANDLE

2 END f -

shy -- 0 i5 32 lo 0

8 i IX~ffit i~ X

J ~ 3 I~ M 14 XXX

VoltmeterSource 2

3 4

Source 4321

I 3-phose 3-wire

Move this Jumper to 1-2 when connecting

Jumper not furnished with switches

switch 3ltgt 4 sw

3-phost 4-wore (future alternate connection)

Source N 3 2 I

2 3

Voltmeter

N 3 2 I

2

43

VOLTMETER

OFF ~

0

VOLTMETER

It 0 0

ONTACT HANDLE

END

lz8~ olt1bull01to I

2

~

ltgt~to

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

2 cj I X

x X I I

IX 1

N-

l

-

-~ -o~1i58 i _I Iv ltgtllooi xx

I X ~~ 14 X

43

_ ___ __ ___

I I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

__t_middot_middot__o_E_s_cR_I_PT_I_O_N__middotmiddot~iiJ4if---_E_sc_UT_middot_C_HE_O_N_amp_co_N_middot-A_CT_middot_0_1AG_RA_M_middot__middot-ll---~-1__middot ____middot_middot~w1_11_1N_C3___D 1AG_RA__M______

VOLTMETER Voltmeter

Fig 101 VOLTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH two three-phase

three-wire circuits

Model No I 6S8 I CF23

Knurled handle

Fig 102 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

Model No 16SBICA7

Knurled handle

Fig 103 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three independent circuits

with off

Model No 16SB 1 CA 1 5

Knurled handle

Fig 104 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH (connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81CA18

Knurled handle

~ ~ OFF

II middot1 i t 1 bull Il I 1

I I i I i

1 I 1 i I ~ i

3))2 I X xx X XIX XbullX

IX X XX

XX X XX xx XXX XXX

X

xx xx xxXX X X XX

LL LL

3~2 I~ flE I xx xx XIX IXIX

xx XX

XX X X ~ XX X X X )

XIX X X X X XXX

~IX

21 I3 lgtltIXX

IX

XXX xx xx

xx

3 2 I 3 2

--t----i--ltgt3

--t---t-----t-lt5

7

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

For three independent circuits remove jumpers 1C-SC and 5C-9C

Source Ammeter 3 2

AMMETER

2

0

AMMETER

2lt o 0

0

AMMETER

2 J

0

oNTACTS HANDLE

END

olz8~ ~middot17-

(i ldegI

~~middot frac12flt

ri81deg ~~

I IZ I~

5 16

I

~ II I I

~NTACT HANDLE

END

middotw~8~ plli

Ir- I rbull I

ri tJ -

lflodeg

l 3

6

~ I II

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

las8~ lotbulli

iof-01

oitbulli

-

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

44

I

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAMDECRIPTION frac34if -et~ lj i

Fig 105 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH three current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA 19

Knurled handle

AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCHFig 106 two current transformers

with off

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA20

I Fig 107 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

two current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S8 I CE2 5

Knurled handle

ig 108 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH four independent circuits -plus off

Mode Ne 16SBICF17

Knurled handle

AMMETER r-ONTACTS HANDLE

2 END J

ILm-shy I~ 0

23~- 0 I X XIXXXX~f-0 2 XXX 3 XX xx XXOirltgt-1 14 XXX

xx xx xx5Pl~ 6 XX

IAMMETER -ONTACTS IHANDLE I2 END

J I IL~1 i5- 3f I~

0 28~- 0

I X-X xxgtIt-ltgt 2 iX xx xx

xx IX X3 Ibir0 4 XIX xx

AMMETER

2

J

0

Positions HANDLE

CONTACTSAMMETER

OFF END M4M ~- 3Mil 2 ~middot~I) XXX~~y-H-o~ XXX

3XX XXX XX XXXX x~I XXri~~ 4XX XXX XXX XXX xmiddotxx x XXX~~-H-o--l

6 XXX 7 XXX

ltgtitHH-ltgt ex xx 9X XXX XXX xx XiX X XXX ~~~ IC X X XXX xx xix x XXX II XX XbullmiddotHmiddot-ltgt--l 12X xx I

Source Ammeter 3 2

Source Ammeter3 2

Source 3 2 Ammeter

Ammeter

Source 4 3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

45

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig 109 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase three wire phase-toshy

phase plus three independent

current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S81 CA21

Knurled handle

Fig 110 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH threeshy

phase four-wire phase-toshy

neutral plus three independshy

ent current-transformer circuits

Model No 16S8 ICA23

Knurled handle

Fig 111 AMMETER-VOLTMETER TRANSFER SWITCH

three-phase three-wire

phase-to-phase plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Model No 16S81 CA24

Knurled handle

Ammeter 3 2 I

AMMETER toNTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

2 ~t ~0 15

8 i 3~ I IX XIX XIX XIX X X xx0 i H 2 X xx xx xx xx xx I I X XX~ f 14 XXX2 1X XX5~- ih XXX 7 X xx xx X XIX XXX ~~ I

fO II XXX 11 XIX X Ifrac12i

i I IX~~ I I

I XIX XIX X I Ilt X

~iio

oi 118

AMMETER ONTACTI VOLTMETER HANDLE

ENDOFF

0 15 8 i 3

bull I x X xx0

I 4

2 5 cbull h 7rf-ltl

( IC II~-fo

fi~III

~middot lh

AMMETER QNTACTIVOLTMETER HANDLE

END2 J

t 0 0

X xx XXX

XX X

2 xx XX

X xx IXIX

xx xx

~

I I

xx XIX X

X

fffltgt-i I~ X ~ X~ X X X

gtif-0-i 5 X XIX XIXIX xx

N 3 2 I

II iI I I 1 ~11Lf I 1

xbullxbullx IXIX X XXXIXX

bullX XIXI

iX XXI

i I bull x xx1x I I I I I

XI XI

I I I I I

I I I I

XI I I I I I i I i

Voltmeter

3 2 I

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

46

7

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switchesr___D_E_S_C_R_IP_T_IO_N_________ES_C_U_T_C_H_EO_N_amp_C_O_NT_AC_T_DI_A_G_RA_M__-II_______W_IR_IN_G_D_IA_G_RA_M__o______

AMMETER N 3 2 Ir-ONTACTSVOLTMETER HANDLEFig 112 AMMETER-VOLTMETER

2TRANSFER SWITCH ) three-phase four-wire

0phase-to-neutral plus

three current transformers

(connect at end of secondary)

Mode No l6SBICA25 Knurled handle

END 01~

1 I~28~ 3 xx xx IX Xril-o-i XX X

X XXX2X~1-ltgt-i~ X xx IY IYo l(ll(~rltgt

IX X Xlgt1 7 r s IX

IXpitlt

Voltmeter

AMMETER

AMMETER

0FF I6

six current transformers with

Fig 113 AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH 5 o 2

4 3off (Connect at end of

secondary)

Model No J6SBJCA28 Knurled handle

AMMETER

0FF I6Fig 114 I O 2AMMETER TRANSFER SWITCH - 4 3six independent circuits plus

off Model No 16S81CA29 Knurled handle

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

47

I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

0

____D_E_s_c_R_1P_r_1o_N__-11-----E-sc_ur_CH_Eo_N_amp_c_o_NT_A_c_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_--1-------w-1A_1N_G_D_1_AG_RA_M______I

-

Fig 115 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S81 81

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 116 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH Model No I 6S8182

Pistol-grip handle

----------ti---------+----------

Fig 117 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally open

Model No 16S81 83

Pistol-grip handle

-Fig 118 CIRCUIT-BREAKER TRIP

SWITCH contacts normally closed

Model No I 658184

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END TripClose Normol~ Cl

0 01lt Xoil-ltgt rbull~ X

X Xi~~i X Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Posrons HANDLEi---~N_o_m~o~N~~-m~o--

END Close g1~ o~ir rrip I z I X~ r2~ middotmiddotmiddot- ----gt-x

~~~~3-~X-+--t--t~X~ ~4 X

Sprong return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 I X 2 X

SPRING RETURN

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACTS HANDLE -

ENO t--0-ili5=r-H

0 811 gt-zltgtiHlohH--tx_______ 1 2 X

Spring return

-+- 0

I I Lamps R

I middot ResLamps G

Res

ol o 2 3 4 i )l)IJ Fuse

-HH-f----- + XIll Fuse Closina bus _ or y

~----+ X --Hgt-----+middotOperating bus or y Tripp---+-~~---

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

48

I

I Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

I Fig 119 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

for operating two breakers

Model No 16S8 I 86

Pistol-grip handle

Fig 120 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH substitute

for push-button station

Model No I 658 I 87

Pistol-grip handle

I Fig 121 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I 89 Pistol-grip handle

-

Fig 122 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 1658 I 8 I 0 Pistol-grip handle

-

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLE

END CJ

TripNormolClose

I Cgt X0$$ X

igtifltgtrlfltgt ~ X XXI X

ltgtif-J-H~ 6 5 X

X

I 4

Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACTlt Positions HANDLE=~ END Close Normal Trip__-$1 1s_

XXiH~IImiddot12 X X gtiRgt 13 X

I Spring return

BREAKER CONTROL CONTACT~ Positions HANDLECJ Norrnol Norrnol

___q ( ofterClose ofterEND TripI lt1p 10

0$$ X~Hfo I

2 X X X~1ltgtiAgti X

X X~~ bull 5ltgtif-06 X X Spring return

wBREAKER CONTROL CONTACTS 0 uHANDLE

DC w 0 END

0~ ~

__I $lt clij 8$8 C ii0 Xltgtil-11lt X

xxltgti~~o X xxltgti~ltgtlilt xx

XXOOoilt I xx ~oring return

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

1+ Trip coil Trip1middot ( coil

Closing Closing5 6

coil coil

f ContoctorI I 0 2 coil

13 y

rc-f + -

OT Closing

gt relay

b1 2 ) W lamp+ 3 b 40b _i---o-~- ~ 5 y60-

Bell alarm I b or recloser

+ -

49

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

ig 126

SCRIPTI middot

Fig 123 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6SBI Bl I

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 124 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16SB 1814

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

Fig 125 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16581815

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull C 0

s 0

middotTi I

Sprini return

IONTACTS I

HANDLE END

lz8~ I

oiitole

o1ltgt0-to 1

5OilltgtOii 16

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz8~ ltgtlttltgtolto ~

gtlo-JoOilo14

5riiooi 6 loltJoojio

18

I

j~ a0 Iu XI

X I XX I XX i

XX l XX I

pr1nq return

I 1 I dl

Jtl ~~middot~j~Ul~I~

x I IX XIXI

X X X i X X I XX I I Xx I I

Spring_ return

DESGRIPTION ESGUTGHEON amp CONTACTi DIAGRAM

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 8 I 6

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

0

ONTACTI HANDLE lhlt

END II ~ oo ~ El Ebullbull ~i]2 IC8~ i ~

II Xltgtiltgtltgtlto XI

3 X 2

XltlltgtOi 14 X xx

lltloltgtliol 5 XX Xxlo1ooito XX

l X XoltlltgtOiio xxI

Spr1nQ return

ig 127 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S81 B 17

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D C

OS

0

C

HANDLE ONTACTS

~Ii END ff

vlo o~z b sect ~ ~ u o o 1-8~ zz IXoltJOltgtIlt I

XI X X

c o-Joolo ~ 1 X

XXoltiooltlo15 XX

XXioioolo XX

Xx ~I -

XX SprinQ reLiLJl

Fig 128 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81818

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

0

ONTACTS ~I~ HANDLE I~~ENO

afOO b ~i ~ -wrnrn~ Uj~~~ IX

~

ltgtlttooto ~ X x 1yen I

fgtlltgtot-1~

X XX XmiddotX

IX X

~1lto1r 5

1ltgtltgt11ltgt XmiddotXmiddot XX I

oltiooliltgt I IXIXI Soring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

50

------

I

--Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

Fig 132

Fig 129 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B19

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D Q c - Osgt

Pull O to Lock

Fig 130 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No 16S8 I B20

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

Pull 0 o Lock

Fig 131 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B21

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull 0 to Leck

tONTACTS HANDLE

END ~-middot

Sprng return

i i[

r Iltgtiiltgtltgtli 2

3ltgtilltgtolto

ltgtiiltgtollltgt ~ 7

ltgtI iltgto i R

8 ~ = f- a

X XX

X XX

X xx xx

XX XX

Soring rPturn

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

Model No 16SB I B22

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

bull _Q

Pull O to lock

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 133

Fig 134 SWITCH

Model No I 6S8 I B24

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D -Q

Pull O to Lock

SWITCH

ModeNo 16SB1B23

Pistol-grip handle

BREAKER CONTROL

D

-Q

Pull O to Lock

HANDLE END

oJz8~

lo o-qoofO

okgtltgtfo

iooi

o[Z8~

laquotoojr

ltgtI lo ltgtIto

ltgti tooj fo

iltgtltgtllo

CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL

T oJ IONTACTS

I

2 3 ~

~fl I _ I u 1 1-9

~ 010 iP ~ EE~0 +1- = - 0 O _ I U ZZI_ Q

X X i

xx x xmiddotxmiddotx 1

XX I xx I

7XX I R Xxmiddot I

Spring return

1~ONTACTI HANDLE

END It ~ i

ltONTACTS ~19i01 ~ ~[

- - u HANDLE

END ~f ~IoJz ~1~t9-- o-o ~Iuzz_CL

I 8~

Xltgti loltgtl i T X Xr

I XIX XXltgtliltgtltgtito 4 xx

XX1iltgtltgtlfo ~ iX X

xTx Iltgtitoolto R XIXI Spring return

E gt2bull10E Uj ~~ a

T X 2 XX 3 X XX X

xx XX5 f X 7 XX R XX

Spring return

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

51

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONT~CT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM bull

I

bull

BREAKER CONTROL rONTACT5 ~

0 ti JHANDLE u uD EEND-(() Co

SIgt E ile Elz

0 ~ ~Pull zgt- tl8~ ~~ to Lock O

Xolooito ~CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROLFig 135 X XI

SWITCH 3 X X XIXlolltgtltgtito 4 XX

Model No l 6SB I B25 5 lllllol loltgtic xxPistol-grip-handle xx Iltgtiloofc Ixx

xx ltgtiloltgti le I XX I Soring return

BREAKER CONTROL ONTACT5 HANDLE 1~1~ uD

END C ~i~Ir i

-g

Osltgt I~ El Ei~ ~I i5Pull O ~1~1~ ~8 ito Lock X

foilooj IX

XXCIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL lof ioltgtilltgtFig 136 Ixxxx SWITCH X X1

foiloolo x-xModel No 16SB 1B26 xxltoltgtilo XXPistol-grip handle xx

ltgtI loo I xx xx

loiloltgtiio 2XX pnng return

WATTMETER ONTACT5

Fig 137 WATTMETER TRANSFER

SWITCH three current coils

OFF

0

01

HANDLE END

oli58 i --

~~ Model No 16SBICB13

Fixed knurled handle 71--0--j

Olltgtltgti

XX 2 XX 3 XX 4 XX

Model No 16SBICF8

Uses removable oval handle 16581CC6bull

gt-1ft1 11~

Oil-

5 XX 6 X X 7 xx 8 XX 9 xix

WATTMETER roNTACTI Fig 138 WATTMETER TRANSFER HANDLE

OFF ENDSWITCH two current coils Oz --Model No 16SBIC812 olz z8~ oo--0Fixed knurled handle xx~-ltgt-iiltgt X X

Model No 16S81CF7 3XX ~ o-~ 4 XXUses removable oval handle 5 XXolfltgt-116S81 CC6bull 6 xx

Source 3 2 I

J 1 Igt J J

I 2Igt bull gt Lf3J 6 4 09 9- __

~ 05 gt-- 0y 8 ~

__ ~r -)

Source 3 2 I

I~ I LI Igt I 1 2bulll Dgt--

5Y

~ 6

rY7 1 c____J

t x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bullRemovable handles must be ordered separately

I

52

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

- 4 I-

Potentiol coi Is of Wattmeter

WATTMETER ONTACTS

Fig 739

-WATTMETER

OFF 0z Fig 140 WATTMETER TRANSFER

0 SWITCH two current

and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CB14 Knurled handle

-

POWER-FACTOR OR WA TT-

METER REVERSING SWITCH

Model No 16S81CA10 Two Position

Knurled handle

Model No 16S81CB4 Three Position

Engraved W - off - RVA

Oe_ 0

Fig 141 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH one

current and two potential coils

Model No 16S81CA26 Fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81CF6 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC5 bull

p F METER

OFF O 1-

0

Fig 742 POWER-FACTOR SWITCH

one or two current coils

Model No 16S81CA22 Knurled handle

PF METER

OFF 0z

0

Model No 16S81CA8 Uses removable oval handle

HANDLE _ END 2rm- gt-lt

iizo_ -~ ~M I X

2 X (jfo4 I

4 X X

i~ 5 16 X

X

pjilt-( 7 X 18 X

ONTACTS

I

HANDLE i END Iim- i luuJ

6~~ XXgtHmiddotltgti 2 X Xi

3 XX 14 Xxmiddot 5 XIXbull

~ ~rltgt-1

bullXX 1 x1x1~toltgti IR X XI

I ONTACTI HANDLE

END

m 6~ -

~ xx-ltgt 2 XX

3 XX

- 5 XX -

egtlltXgtj XX

ONTACTI HANDLE

END

1[5 flj XX

8~ gtH-0 1 XX

I XXOj~ 14

Pot IronAuto Irons -I 2

i 0- 4

Pot trans Auto Iron 0- 6

Pot trans Auto trans 7 8

Potential coils of Wottmeter

Current Potential coils cells

le middotvv y

3 2 I

~ I 2

fL _l Ll~ 4y

95 0 6bJ

7 6 8

I I

-

3 2 I

u

J 6 I

2ltrrlCurrent coiln

Potential~~~ coils6sf~ +

Source 3 2 I

J

~ I ~ rti middot I lil 16SB1CC5 bull

x in 011 contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

53

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM -------bull----------- bull------------

-

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 143 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH OFF END01machine-to-bus aZ

Ziwith interlocks 81~ 000 I X 2

Model No 16SB 1 CF9 -iraquo X

Uses removable oval handle ~ X 4 X

bull ~ol l

16SB1CC7 bull

lSYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLEFig 144 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDIbetween machines without ~- Iii

potential transformers sectI~ r~R0 I XModeNo 16S81C815 ii-o- 2 I X

Uses one each removable ~ XI middot J O-J-

14 I Xoval handles

R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

SYNCHROSCOPE ONTACTS HANDLE -XFig 145 SYNCHRONIZING SWITCH ENDI z

ltIamiddotzbetween machines J81~ l~R0with interlocks XIgt--gt-iModel No 16SBIC85 2 X _]_ XUses one each removable

oval handles R = 16SB1CC8 bull

I = 16SB1CC7 bull

GOVERNOR ONTACTI HANDLE

J a ltI w wE

ENDFig 146 GOVERNOR OR RHEOSTAT ~ a -MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH alz 00lt1 J z a8~(split-field motors are standshy

XI XgtltH 2 X Xard for most applications)

I-+---+-------

2-+gt--+-------shy3-+f-+--+--1-----

L1m1t switch Low-er

~--+--~ L1m1 2 switch

Lower t-t-+-t----

3 X X~HModel No 16SB1A 1 4 X X

5 XRadial handle T n X I X

XL 8 Spring return

bull in oil conloct diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

54

I

__ __

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

___D_e_s_c_RI_PT_I_ON_e_s_cur_c_H_e_o_N_amp_c_o_N_TA_C_T_D_IA G_RA_M DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

- Fig 141 MOTOR-CONTROL SWITCH

for split-field motors

Mode No 16SB 1 AA 1

Pistol-grip handle

MOTOR CONTROL

Fig 148 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to five coils and test

Palladium contacts

ModeNo 16SB1CE33

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

0 d

3

-ONTACTIHANDLE I

END I I-VJ~-

~

tgtirltgt~

~H~

lgt-1 ~~

lgt-1 ~H

lgt-1 ~1

H~

~ff i N -~ XI

X2 X Xj X

X X X4 X5

X6 X X X7

X X XB Xl

I( X X X XII

XX12 X

Fig 149 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Model No 1 6SB 1 CE28

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END I-

0 VJ15 N8~ -

X tgti~

I X

3 X 2

XX ~ H X X X

5 4

X H lJ1

X 7 6

X X X ~~ X X X 1B

Fig 150 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils and test

Palladium contacts

Mode No 16S81CE29

Knurled handle

TEMP METER

TEST

rlt) 0 -

2

Fig 151

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

ram-~ 1gt-11ltgt-i

lt j XHi-ltgt

4 5 X1gt-1-ltgt

11

lgt-11ltgt-1

111ltgt-1 X I I

p-lf-o-i X12

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to four coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16S81CE52 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

With fixed knurled handle

Model No 16S81 CE61

TEMP METER

OFF _

~A

0

2

ONTACTI HANDLE

END 0 15

8~ p-1~~ I~ X I j

l_I 5

~

lgt-1 XI

HI~ I

12 X XX

X

XX

XX

X

X X

N - X

X XX

X XX

l(N

X

X X

X

X

XX X

XX X

I-

- VJ

X X

I-

VJ

X

X X

X X

-0

X

X X

X XX

X

X XX

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

bull Removable handles must be ordered separately

55

-------

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshyFig 152-FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to three coils

with test and off

Palladium contacts

Model No 16SB1CE55 Uses removable oval handle

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

ModeNo 16S81CE63

TEMP METER CONTACTI HANDLE

OFF END -lt 0 i5rn

8 c0 Xc 1gt11-ltgt-itoI

X X X lgti-0-l X X X

X X X gti-0-i X X XI

~ X X XgtiJ-o~lktxbx+x+-+-+-+++--+-+-+-+~

Fig 153 TEMPERATURE-METER TRANSshy

FER SWITCH transfers two

wires to three coils

with test and off

Model No 16S81CE57

Uses removable oval handle

TtMPMETER CONTACTS--_0SITI0NS - BACK VIEW IFig 155 6 OF~EST H~~LE 6 5 4 3 2 I ~ ~

5 o I 4 2 1-o-1 ~ 1pound4--+-+--1--1--HHx+--l--i-+-H-+-+~

3

TEMPERATURE METER TRANS- 1-o-1~~t-1--+-+-H-+-+xhx+x1-+-H-+-+-+--I 1

FER SWITCH transfers two ~ 1-o-l i1-~-+--+-+-+-+-h-7t-i1-t--+-+-+-+---t--X-+--t-1 wires to six coils and test 1-~---~+=+-+-+-t-t-txgt+--+-+-+-+--+--+=+JC=+JC-+JC--1

7 8 7Palladium Contacts 1-o-ll-o-ll-o-+1-=+-+-++-+JC+JCgt+Ixgt+-+-+-+--++-+-+-+-l Model No 16S8 I CE67 ~1-o-l ~i~ci---+-+-t-x+-+-+-~-+-+---+IX-gt+-+-+-+-4

1Knurled handle It J2 It X X X

o-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUltgt i-t2=+--+-~11lt-rtx-+x=+x-+-+-+-+--+Jt-Lt-gt+--+--+-- l-~__f-o-l-1plusmn-+-1-X~+u-ir-+-+-+--t-+Art--t-+-t--+-+-t

15 1615 X XIXo-l lmiddotltgtmiddotUbullol1s++x-+xx-+--+-+-+-1--t+-Lgti-gt+--+-+-+- -Fig 156 SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-POLE

single-throw maintain contact

Model No 16581 CG I

With spring return

ModeNo 16581CG2

Oval handle

CONTACTI HANDLE

END OFF O u~115 z

0081c0

16SB1CC19 bull

For fixed knurled handle

Model No 16581 CE62

TEMP METER

OFF -lt rn

0 ~

I

ONTACT5HANDLE

END ~- ~ u

181~ -~-~N-bull-bullmiddot=-~ lgtit~i~+-+2--+-gt--+--+-x+---+-+-+---+----+~

X XX~ to-X X X4

X5gtiio X6

X XX A 7 1-j

X X X

Fig 157 THREE- OR FOUR-POLE

single-throw maintain contact ModeNo 16S81CGJ

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG4

Oval handle

ONTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

ZLL0 i5 8 c 1000

TEMPMETERFig 154

5 OF~EST 4 or

3 2

TEMPERATURE METER TRANSbull

FER SWITCH transfers three

wires to five coils and test

Palladium Contacts

Model No I6S8 I CE66

Knurled handle

CONTACTS POSITIONS - BACK VIEW

HANDLE Ill

END 1t51tlllll-41111111311112111t1tliw

~fltgt-i ~l-~+-ll-l-+1-++1-++t-++-1-++-lf-+-t-l--t~IP+-Y+i

7 87 JCoH-o-ll-o_+-+-+-1-1-+~+-+-+-+-++-1-+-++-+-ii-+-1-+-+-+-t8

9 10 9 o-jfltgt-lf-o fQ IYIY

13 J4~13fl-+t-+++-+-+-+-t-+-t-H~JC+-+-+-t-++-t--t-+-t-o-t 1-ltgtmiddotlbullo 14 X

15 1615 ltgt-11-ltgtil-ltgt 61JC ll

Fig 158 A FIVEbull OR SIX-POLE B 7-ORBmiddotPOLE C 9middot OR 10middot D 11middot OR 12- -single-throw maintained single-throw POLE POLE 1 throw Model No 16S81CG5 maintained With spring return

maintained single-throw 16SB1CG11

Model No 16S81CG6 16S81CG7 maintained Wspr rel 16S81CG9 Wspr rel

Oval handle 16S81CG12 16SB1CG10

16S81CG8 Wspr ret

~NTACT5 HANDLE

END OFF 01 LL

Z LLsect~ 00 Xotto-ito X X

ottootto X X

oiloltgtllo X

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

I

I

56

I l

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

_iOEspR1JgtTPtJ1~spu1bfQNamp comAc101f-GAAM

Fig 159 SINGLE-POLE double-throw

with off maintain contact

Model No J6SBICGJ3

With spring return

Model No 16SB1CG14

Oval handle

lONTACTI HANDLE

ENDOFF lt 1i58~0

Iltgtlt-ltgt-i 12

DOUBLE-POLE double-throwFig 160 with off maintain contact

Model No I 6S81 CG 15

With spring return

Model No 16S81 CG 16

Oval handle

0NTACTI HANDLE

END

OFF

0 lt 01i58~

olrltgti I 2 3

ltgtifltgt-)o 4

-

I Fig 161 A THREE-POLE double-

throw with off maintain

Model No 16SB1CG17

With spring return

Model No 16S81CG18 Oval handle

OFF lt

0

-

B

u u

NO-

X X

u u

NO-

X X

X X

C D 4P-dt wloff SP-dt wfoff 6P-dt wloff maintain maintain maintain

16SB1CG19 16S81CG21 16SB1CG23

Wlspr rel Wlspr rel Wispr ret 16SB1CG20 16SB1CG22 16S81CG24

r-0NTACTI HANDLE

END u0 i5 u

IN o -8~ I X~fo-i 7 X

Xlol ro-ito 13 14 X 5 X

ltgtI rltgtiio 16 X

Fig 162 SINGLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG25

Oval handle

t0NTACTI HANDLE

END lt 0 i5

-bull-

X 0 8~

PltH 7 I

X

-

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON ampCONTACT DIAGRAf-1

Fig 163 DOUBLE-POLE double-throw Model No 16SB1CG26

Oval handle

lt

0

A164Fig

Fig 165 SINGLE-POLE triple-throw

THREE-POLE double-throw

Model No 16S81 CG27

Oval handle

lt

0

Model No 165B 1 CG32

Oval handle

2 J

0

Fig 166 SINGLE-POLE four-throw Model No 16B 1 CG33

Oval handle

I

ltt 0 N

3

Fig 167 SINGLE-POLE five-throw Model No 16S81 CG34

Oval handle

31 9

- 0 u

l0NTACTI HANDLE

END

~-~ -

I XoH-o-Hltgt - X I X

ltgti-0-- 14 X

B 4P-dt 16SB1CG28 C SP-dt 16SBICG29

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-N-~

Xkgtltt-o--to - X Xkgtltrto 4

I X

5 Xltgt1-0--fo f X

-0NTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-IN-

I ~

XfgtiH X

~xltgtllo

toNTACTS HANDLE

ENO

0 i5 N-8~ XltgtIH X12

I XiolH 14 X

CQNTACTI HANDLE

END

_sect~ W1 X~H X

X~fltgt-lto X Xloio

D 6P-dt 16SB 1 CG30 E 7P-dt 16S81 CGJI

x in all contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

57

------- I

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION ESCUTCHEON amp CONTACT DIAGRAM

-Fig 168 SINGLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 1658 I CG35

Omiddotal handle

QNTACTS HANDLE

ENO (o ~ C j5

0 8 G c I~H-i z4

ltgtil-ltgt-lfol~ 5ioiH fi

Fig 169 SINGLE-POLE seven-throw

Model No 1658 I CGJ6

Oval handle

4 s I cS

__0

Fig 170 SINGLE-POLE eight-throw

Model No 16S81CG37

Oval handle

~

- (l0 ltls

5

Fig 171 SINGLE-POLE 10-throw

Model No 16S81CG38

Oval handle

)12 0) v

ct) 0 -A

lt C6

X

X

~ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO

N- X

X X

X

li5 N-8 G - XI~1-ltgt-l

2 X

Xbit-ofo1 ~ X X5ioiHto X6

7 Xltgtiiltgt

ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

la_ N-I8 i5G X

oHfo~ X

ltgtil-ltgt-li1~

ltgtI t-o 5 X i6 X

ltgtHi18 7

X

ONTACTS HANDLE

END C j5

a_ N-Qa ltrl8 G X

ltgt1Hfo~ X 3 Xjojt-o 4 X

Xltgtil-ltgt-lfo 5 X

Xlltgtil-ltgt-lto X

X oil-ltgt-li1 X

x in ell contact diagrams denotes contacts closed

58

SINGLE-POLE 12-throwFig 172 Model No 1658 I CGJ9

Oval handle

l I 2 ~

Q O t

cS c amp 7 ~

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENO 9Ji581i

Iltgtif--gt-l lt 1ltgt1-ltgt-l 14

5

lo t-o

1-it-ltgt-i

fgtll-ltgt-li1 X

fHto II2 X

DOUBLE-POLE lour-throwFig 173 ModeNo 16SBICG40

Oval handle

Sf 0 N

3

ONTACTS HANDLE

END

lz 1 8~ pr-0-j

lt ~pl-ltgt-1

14 5

tgtil-ltgt-1 b X I

tgtil-ltgt-l 18 X

Fig 174 DOUBLE-POLE six-throw

Model No 16581 CG41

Oval handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

END (o ~~ G 0

Pf-07 I 24 3P-l-ltgt-1 4 5p-1-ltgt-l I X

tgtit-oi X

p1-ltgt-l I X

p 1-ltgt-l I 12 X

X X

X X

X X I

X

X

N-

X

X

X

X

X

X

N-

X

X

Contact Diagrams for SB-1 Switches

____D_Es_c_R_1_Pr_1o_N___-1---Es_c_u_r_c_H_E_o_N_amp_c_o_NT_Ac_r_o_1A_G_RA_M_________w_1R_1N_G_D_1A_G_RA_M______I

-

-

I

-

I

DOUBLE-POLE eight-throwFig 175 Model No 16SB 1CG42

Oval handle

DOUBLE-POLE 12-throwFig 116 Model No 16SB 1CG43

Oval handle

Fig 117 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCH

Model No 16S81 CG44

Pistol-grip handle

~ONTACTS HANDLE

ENO

~-ICX_IOOsfN-

X~-0-i X

X~-0-i X

X ~-0-i X

X~i-o-1 I X

I X11-o-1 12 X X

gtii-o-1 I~ X gt-0-i If X

X

ONTACTI HANDLE

ENOl- I 2 ltY

Q O Jgt

CS V) il -0-i fltHH---1---l-l-+X+--i-++-t-lHX e 7 ~

~ -0-i f-ltH1f+-1-+x+-1-++-i-+x+-+--i-

321

MOTOR CONTROL ONTACTI HANDLE

o- bull s c-lt -1-5gt I i---E-N-D--1d Q_ - ) g~ ~~~ 0

~-0-i IXL 2 XX H---~60Soring return

x in oll contoct diogrom5 denotes contacts closed

59

bull bull

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - -

-------

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches

Specification Form GED-3933 has been designed for data-processing equipment and also to make it easier to fill out Refer to Fig 178 and proceed as follows to fill out the form

CD FOR FACTORY USE ONL y (Blocks 9 through 18)

These blocks are for factory use only and should be left blank

CATALOG NUMBER (Blocks 19 through 25)

This number is assigned at the factory and these blocks should be left blank

ACTION

This part of the form is broken into five sections detailed under the five following points (4-8)

MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS (Block 26)

Put an X in this block if all the positions are maintained and put in a dash (-) if they are not maintained

reg SPRING RETURN FROM COUNTER-CLOCKWISE POSITIONS (Blocks 27 and 28)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 27 and the position the spring return is to in Block 28 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

SPRING RETURN FROM CLOCKWISE POSITIONS

(Blocks 29 and 30)

Put the number of the position the spring return action is from in Block 29 and the position the spring return is to in Block 30 Put in a dash when this action does not apply

MAINTAINED POSITION WITH SPRING RETURN (Blocks 31 through 34)

GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES 17 Refer to GEAbull4746 and GETamp169 lor descriptive Information 1)-

YES=X I KNURLED = Ilt I A STANDARDbull S INO- I H OVAL = V 18

C TARGET = T

~ SR FROM Sll FROM MAINlt PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C y NONE = N I ESCUTCHEONT ALL CclOl I CJI POs TO D LEVER = L

(SPECIAL) = P I KEYWAVS6 POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS WITH LOCK L ROUND D

N 1 gJtREt ~NONE =N ~ KEYED = R b FOR R[M KOL) I MAI NTAt NED - - SPRING RETURN TO MATCH SB-1- N I

LC==~-~=SB~M=S~WIT~CH~oPE~RA-T-ING-RE-QU~IR~EM-EN~T TABLE 12 USE OILY WHENMARK INTFRtiDIATE POS

1--- -- ~SUP CONTACTS~ (4-~) lARE REQUIREDI r r r r r I

gt-- STANDARD ESC TARGET ESC 5

zPOSITIONSCCNTACTS I2 078 I 4 ~26 4 2 u5 3000 EVENlbull 8l (9 I~

2 I ~ ~~ ~to 2 2

12S-32l 3 3 6

Ol Ill to ~16 4 74 0 D(41-48) 5 5

OI~ _(IO 6 6 )(57-64) 7 8

8 7l POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING 8)

(6-8) OI~ ~to 8 9-~ I I I I I I IllW19- I99 I I I I I I

~to jto 10 middot16)

10 17~4~ Li I I I I middot1 t--2

10 ~ 07 (ZS-JlJ 11 II I I I I I I I33-ltC

41-lt8 I I I I I I~to 0~12 12W-41 I -3 (41-48) I I I I I I I13 13 I I I I I I I

14Oillt deg ~

14 4 -I I I I I I I

1615 (6-8) 165-72(57-64) 15 9--16 I I I I I I III ill

5 -1-- ---1-1-oir iO 16 16 $ 8)

9 16) 17 lgt-32 I I I I I I I17 17 18 ~ 6OI IO OI IO 18 18 I I I I I I I(17-24) ~-141-41 I I I I I I I125-32) 192019 -79

I I I I I I I149-sbullOlllt Jlltlgc 120 ~7 I I I I I

I 18171615141312111 61514 I I 3 I 2 I I I 8 STOP LOCATIClIS I 155-7~_J STOP LOCATIONS r r I I I I I I I

TERMINAL LOCATION-- -r-t (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER UNO (6-Sl ClltT DESIGNATIOII ENGRAVING 222 TIERS MAX (JO)

~ lI 7~~~ I I I I I ~a)

I II ~ ~

TTL1Ql91[ I I I I I I I I L (80

11 Ill ll GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAG MENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 GE0-39338 12-75(JM)

Fig 178 Specification form Type SBM switches

starting with Block 31 and the HANDLES lowest position number Put a (Block 37) dash in the blocks that remain

Select the proper code letter NOTE With maintained- and (K V P Lor N) to identify the spring-return action if Position type of handle desired Indicate 3 is being used Position 3 is the appropriate letter in this always a maintained position block The code letters A B C

amp D are used when a matching Type SB-1 handle is requested PULL-TO-LOCK

(Blocks 35 and 36) NOTE For removable-typeshy

When Pull-to-Lock is desired handle switches the code N the positions in which the for none is used since removable

When you have the combishy handle is to be pulled and locked handles are furnished as a nation of maintainecJ springshy are indicated in these blocks A separate item and are not return action the maintained dash is indicated in both blocks furnished with the switch See positions are put in these blocks when Pull-to-Lock is not desired Removable-Handles Section

0 I

60

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

( ESCUTCHEONS (Block 38)

Select the proper code letter (S T N P or R) for the desired escutcheon and put it in this block When a keyed escutcheon is required for a removable handle use the letter R and refer to Point 11 Escutcheon Keyways It should be noted that code P is a special escutcheon This code is used when Lamicoid escutcheons are required The description Lamicoid must also be specified in Special Instrucshytions on the form as described in Point 17

ESCUTCHEON KEYWAYS (Blocks 39 through 43)

These blocks are used only when a keyed escutcheon (Code R) is specified Three keyways are normally used and informashytion in these blocks is generally assigned at the factory See Removable-Handles Section

INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS (Blocks 44 through 51)

The SBM switch has eight pos1t1on locations with 45 degrees between positions When 90-degree pos1t1oning is reshyquired the 45-degree position location becomes an intershymediate (non-feel) position An X in one of the eight blocks above the positions indicates this position to be an intermediate position See the section on Over I a pp i ng (make-beforeshybreak) Contacts

OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE - The vertical numbers 1 to 20 are the contact numbers The horizontal numbers 1 through 8 are the position locations

Put an X in the block under the position in which you want that contact to close If that contact is to be open leave the block blank As the right of the table is sketch of a standard escutcheon to aid in identifying the position locations on the switch

When slip contacts are reshyquired use the table on the right showing Position locations 1 through 5 only (as indicated) Under Position 3 there are two columns (2 and 4) to show if a contact is to be closed in Position 3 only when coming from Position 2 or when coming from Position 4 Whatever conshytact action occurs in only Position 3 from 2 will also occur in Position 2 and 1 (when used) and whatever contact action occurs in only a from 4 will also occur in Positon 4 and 5 (when used) Refer to Slip Limitashytions and how to overcome them before completing this part of the form

If a contact is not a slip contact and you want it to close in Position 3 put an X in both columns under Position 3

STOP LOCATIONS - At the bottom of the switch operating tables are Blocks number 1 through 8 and 1 through 6 which identify the stop locations The stop locations vertical lines positions

are bet

under ween

the the

Example When using Positions 2 3 and 4 circle stop location Number 2 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 1 from Position 2 and circle stop location Number 5 to show that the handle is not to go to Position 5 from Position 4 For 360-degree rotation do not circle any stops

reg CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ENshyGRAVING - Specify the circuit designation desired in the 22 blocks following the blocks marked 108 A maximum of 22 characters can be specified

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING There are two lines of engraving available for each position ( 1 through 8) and a maximum of eight characters per line If only one line is required use the top line

If a position is to be blank write (BLANK) for that position When a target escutcheon is specified leave Position 3 blank

If the entire escutcheon is to be blank write BLANK ESCUTCHEON under Special Instructions (Point 17) at the bottom of the form

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

There are four rows of blocks to be used for any special inshystructions such as the handle painted red Lamicoid escutcheon for thick panel blank escutcheon jumpers etc

There are two types of Jumpers available for the SBM switch Jumper 307V515 for contacts on the same stage and Jumper 307V512 for jumpering contacts on adjacent stages

NOTE Jumpers are only furnished assembled where reshyquired on all standard listed switches For unlisted switches separate jumpers can be ordered

EXAMPLES OF FILLED-OUT

SPECIFICATION FORMS

Fig 179 A specification form for SBM switches four-position pull-toshylock switch with pistol-grip handle and standard escutcheon Action is spring return from Positions 1 and 2 to Position 3 maintained action in Posishytions 3 and 4 with handle locked against turning when it is pulled out in Position 1 The handle will stay in position till it is pushed back to the IN position Contacts 3 4 7 8 9 and 10 qre slip contacts Note Conshytacts in Position 1 do not change when the handle is pulled out Under Special Instructions 2 jumpers (307V515) are to be furnished loose with the switch

Fig 180 A specification form for a three-position breaker-control switch with spring return from Posishytion 2 to Position 3 and from Position 4 to Position 3 pistol-grip handle and target escutcheon required for thick panel (1-inch or 1-12 inch) slip conshytacts 1 2 1 8 and 9 Note that Position 3 is not engraved when a target escutcheon is used

Fig 181 A specification form for a four-position switch with maintained action no handle keyed escutcheon for removable handle with keys at Positions 2 3 and 4 and 360-degree rotation (no stops) using only Posishytions 1 3 5 and 7 (intermediates at Positions 2 4 6 and 8)

61

I

Ordering Guide for SBM Switches (Contd)

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer toGEA-4746 and GET-1119 tor ctescrlptln ln1orm11Uc1

rI LLJ 1 II

fjl ~ I~ STA~RObull s I C TARGETbull r yNONE N I ESCUTCHEON

C (SPECI-L)bull K[YWAtS

~ KEYED bull A 1 0 obull l-OOl N

~~] 1_Jbull~S10Pc7~~=~5-4---3--2--IL6ST~ ~OCAroi 2 I

TEIIMINAL LOATIOHL (tlAX2LINESBLETTE~PElI LIN) ~ a1 OCT C61GNATIOII ~ 22 LETTERS MAX omLWlbull1I I I I I I I ITIU I I I I I I I I I I

~r lflulRWltlampINI 121 jJIVWIPlllelSj l3lt7IV)illjsj OO

11111111 11 1111111 111 001deg11111111111111 11111111111111111111

11111111111111 IJlillll11 1TTTTCi GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWERmiddotSYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 180 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Reier toGEA-4746 and GETbull 1H for dMcrfptlve mtormatlon

LI t11 11 CATAl(X N

rii (~)

A

Alt2T POSITIONS

1- I I I I a 1 6 5 3 2 1 6 5 ltI 3 2 I 8 -- --- - -shy

5TOPLQCATIQNS middot- SiOP LOCATICNS tradeAt2 LINES B LETTERS PER UN)

001n~aM~~w1~~~~ ~~~i ~ IAIEl lk1ElgtIEIPI IFjoje( IR1l=oflov1Al6~jEj lol

~ (9) WiAWOILIE 2 i3lw~2l3l41 je(eb40 IVIEDI I 00f7fM7PJols[illj]TCiJNrl3TT I 1 ) I i I i I I I I I I I I I I I

11111111111111 111 l(llltlTTTTD GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 179 Example of completed specification form

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPICIFICATION FORM TYPI SBM SWITCHES Reier to GEA-47C6 llnd QET-111t for dncrlptfM lnfommkm

bull-bull ltbull--r1ITIsectill 11 I I 11 ICATAlX NO

I I 111

(IThlii( I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111111111111 11 111 I 1 I 11111II1111 11 111 1111111111TTTTCi

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19l42

Fig 181 Example of completed specification form

- --

--------------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches

The specification form for SB-1 -9 GENERAL fj ELECTRIC and -10 switches GED-3934 is in two

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES parts as described below Part 1 (see Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

Fig 182) permits the easy specificashytion of SB-1 -9 and -10 switch conshytact arrangements escutcheons handles etc including the lateralshyaction switching capabilities of the SB-10 switch Part 2 (see Fig 191) is for optional features such as tandem mechanism separately-mounted locks

-etc

CD POSITION LOCATION

I

It is important to select the proper position location to avoid certain limitations which could add to the cost of the switch The handle-position location areas are shollm front view facing the handle Select the desired degrees between positions and mark the position numbers Going in a clockwise direction Position 1 starts in the extreme counter-clockwise (CCW) position When 360-degree rotation is required Position 1 starts at 1200 oclock

(I) CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

Note If lateral action is re-quired consult instructions Numbers 11 and 12 before completing this section

The vertical columns on the left (numberes 1 to 32) are the contacts The position numbers should be marked in the top column under Handie Positions

I

Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK LAT STAGES l(2)MARK Xdeg FOR CLOSED CONTACT ON SB-10 SWITCHES

WITH A DOT ()

I

CONTACTS HANDLE ENO OOD EVEN

-H- -H---1 E3~1--II- --1 I---1 f- --1 f--If- -I---1 I- -H-

--1 I- --1 f--II- -II--II- -H---11- -If---11- --11-

--lf--H -II- -II---If- -ll--ll- --11-

-II- --11-BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION 0 ROTATllfG ACTICNI

2 HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 I B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2bull 27 2R 29 30 JI 32

MAIITTAINEDALL POSITIONS1----------- - - --

SPRING RETURN ACT I ON

bull S R FROM CCW POS S R FROM CW POS

KNURLED

OVAL

FROM POS bull TO bull FROM bull TobullPOS p I STOL GR Ip --------~--------~~N~ ~0-=- __IT[IJ_ _ _ _ _ LEVER

PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull ROUND

RADIAL

bullbull

MARK HANDLE POSI~ (FRONT _VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE (4A)ENGRAVING POS ESCUTCHEONmiddot tNGRAVI NG

(41-

reg JCOYER (NEMA I) DI

TARGETbull --------bull bull ~~~~~ F~NOLE bull D ~~~--~o~-=shyD NONE bull

STANDARD OR ROUND bull

SPECIAL ___FUl OUT BROW FOi 58-10 c_ L PISTOL GRIP bull -----1

UTOW ACTIOII Q2J bull ~---~reg~----__r--r--jN~ONE~__lJJ______J PANEL THICKNESS INo ROTATION WHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) ~Q)

sdegPR~INccG-R~ETccUR-N~T~O~----N-~10-UT_ __ SPEC I AL REMARKS~~--------------shyPUL L I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS

hT~OcOPENcoNT~ACTS=---------1

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT bull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GE0-3934B Part l

12-78t2MI

(back view) The term back view means that the positions are read from right-to-left for the contact arrangement only

Refer to Fig 183A An X only under handle Position 1 and across from Contact 1 means that Contact 1 will only close when the handle is in Position 1 An X under handle Positions 2 and 3 and across from Contact 2 means Contact 2 will close when the handle is turned to Position 2 and remain closed when turned to Position 3 (see Cam Action and Limitashytions before proceeding)

Refer to Fig 1838 An astershyisk between the position numshybers is used to indicate inter-

Fig 182 Specification form Type SB-1 SB-9 and SB-10 switches

mediate position to show the Action under Cam Action and special contact action desired Limitations between the designated CONTACT CONNECTIONSpos1t1ons (Refer to Overshylapping Contacts) For specifyshy Mark the contact connections ing the contact arrangement desired for each stage in the with a slip action see Slip manner shown in Fig_ 183C

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-H-o o--11--0

ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE o-11-o--11-0WITH COMMON TERMINAL

ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITHOUT COMMON TERMINAL o-11--11-o3 21 FOR DOUBLE- BREAK ACTIONX X(Bl Xo-J 1-o o-H--o I I

X X X X12 (C)

Fig 183 Notations to show contact arrangement and connections

63

-----------------

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

Some examples of correct and incorrect notation are shown in Fig 184

A common mistake is to show double-break contacts when they are not desired (a) Here the requirement is clearly

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

~

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PQS Sf FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO [ZllFROM P0S ~ TO~

~---~ _0 __ITIIJ_ - - - -PULL TO LOCK IN P0S ____bull

HANDLE POSITIONS

(FV)

2- i3 4 I~~

37 12

ROTATIIIC ACTION MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROH CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

FROM P0S [I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~

~--------~-------~HA---N~_Omiddot __ITIIJ____ _ PULL TO LOCK IN POS ----bull

that Contact 1 is closed in (AJ (BJPosition 1 that Contacts 1 and 2

are open in Position 2 and that Contact 2 closes in Position 3 However with no common terminal neither Position 1 nor Position 3 will make a circuit closure There must be a common terminal as shown in (b)

If double-break action is reshyquired use the notation shown in (c)

RIGHT l~~~~IJH( B)

1RIGHT 1~H~~1~l2 l I ( C)

Fig 184 Correct and incorrect notashytion ofcontact connections

ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

Under POS indicate the pos1t1on numbers which are marked in the handle-position blocks portion of the form Indicate the desired engraving for the position next to it under Escutcheon Engraving

The circuit designation if desired is marked in the circuit plate engraving block above the escutcheon engraving

HANDLES

Check the appropriate block to indicate the design of handles desired Available handle types are shown in GEA-4746

ROTATINC ACTION ROTATING ACTIOflllHANDLEHANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED All POSITIONS bull POSITIONSPOSITIONS bull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM ccw POS lSR FROM cw POS SR FROM CCW PCS SR FROM CW P0S

FROM Pos [I] TO ~ iFRON Pos O ToO FROM P0S bull TO bull FRON ~P0S To[l]N2l rnt---------~-------MAINT P0S ~11AINT PCS ITillITIIJLJ t---------------- ~---------------bull LiPULL TO LOCK IN POS ____ PULL TO LOCK IN P0S bull

(CJ (DJ

IOTATING lCTIOfll ROTATIIC ICTIOIIHANDLE HANDLE MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS MAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS bullPOSITIONS POSITIONSbull

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACTION (FV) rn SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW PCS sF FROM CW P0S $A FROM CCW POS SR FROM CW POS

2 134 FRON P0S O TO O iFRON Pos ~ Tolll FROM P0S (I] TO ~ FRON P0S ~ TO~1~5u ~--------~-------

~INTPOS 11Zh11 - HAINT POS ~

bull SPECIAL PULL TO LOCK IN Pasmiddot ULL TO LOCK POS ----0IN

(EJ (FJ

bull ROTATIIIC ACTIONROTATIIIC ACTIONHANDLE HANDLE HAINTAINEO ALL POSITIONSMAINTAINED ALL POSITIONS DPOSITIONS POSITIONS

(FV) SPRING RETURN ACT I ON SR FROM CCW P0S sR FROM CW P0S bull

SPRING RETURN ACTION SR FROM CCW P0S SR FROM CW POS

bull~4 FROM Pos [Z] TO II] iFRON Pos Ii] To[sj FROM P0S [I] TO ~ lFRON P0S ~ Toi21 ~ ---------~-------HA I NT P0S ITIIJHAINT P0S ITIIJSPECIAL u

LILL TO LOCK IN POS fl]

(G) (HJ

Fig 185 Specification form indicating rotating action

Check the block next to the direction to NORMAL (see exshydesired escutcheon When a amples C and D Fig 185) keyed escutcheon is checked the position in which the handle Maintaining Position - When is to be removable must be spring-return and maintained given along with any other action is desired both the necessary information ( Refer to spring-return positions as per Removable Handles) above and the maintained posishy

tions are marked (see examples E and F Fig 185)(J) ROTATING ACTION

Pull-to-Lock-In Position This portion of the form is When a pull-to-lock action is

broken into four separate secshy desired (see GEA-4746) fill-in tions Please refer to Fig 185 the position in which the handle

is to be pulled and latch (seeMaintained All Positions examples G and H Fig 185)When the handle is maintained

in all positions check this block

ESCUTCHEONS PANEL THICKNESSSpring Return Action - Can For information and illustrashy be provided from both direcshy Give the panel thickness ir1

tions of the available tions to NORMAL (see examples inches This information is very escutcheons refer to GEA-4746 A and B Fig 185) or from one important in selecting the proper

I

64

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

CONTACT ARRANGEMENTON SBmiddot 10 SIITCHES MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACTMARK LAT STAGES

I shaft and spacers however it is frequently not specified If the panel thickness is not given the switch will be furnished for mounting on panels up to 316-inch thick Most switches can be furnished for mounting in panels up to two-inches thick

COVER (NEMA I)

The switch will be furnished with an extruded vinyl cover which meets NEMA I requireshyments Switches with one to twelve top terminals on the fixed-contact support assembly will be furnished with a standard cover Switches with 13 to 32 top terminals will be furnished with larger covers to allow more room for the additional wires

) SPECIAL REMARKS

This space is provided for any additional information which may be required in the design of the switch When GED-3934 Part 2 is used with Part 1 a notation should be made to indicate that both parts of the specification form have been used

8 LATERAL CONTACT ACTION (SB-10 Switches oaly)

Complete this section only when ordering a Type S8-10 Switch which has both lateral and rotary contacts To identify the lateral stages mark a dot in the designated blocks to the far left of the contact arrangement (Maximum four lateral stages two contacts per stage) Note Do not put an X under the handle positions for these conshytacts An X is used only for the rotary contacts ( Fig 186A)

I The action of the lateral conshy

tacts is described in the Lateral Action blocks Refer to Fig 1868

If you want to prevent rotary action in one of the lateral positions (either IN or OUT)

111TH A DOT ()

j CONTACTS

reg HANDLE END OOD EVEN

-H- -H--H- 1f--H- 1 f-1f- 1f--H 1 f-

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

I 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10

(A)

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATpoundRAL ACTION

reg NO ROTATION IHEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING I IN amp OUTJ SPRING RETURN TO I IN I OUT PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(Bl

OPERATIONS OF SB-10 SWITCHES

One Lateral Stage

Pull to open contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-2 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Two Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to close contacts 1-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-4 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Three Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-6 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-6 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-6 Maintaining or spring return out

Four Lateral Stages

Pull to open contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to close contacts 1-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-6

and close 7-8 Maintaining or spring return in Pull to open contacts 1-2

and close 3-8 Maintaining or spring return out Pull to open contacts 1-4

and close 5-8 Maintaining or spring return in or out

Pull to open denotes the same contact action as push to close Pull to close denotes the same contact action as push to open

(Cl

Fig 186 Notation for specifying Type SB-10 switch action

cross out the other position If spring-return action when the you want rotary action in both lateral action is in the NORMAL the IN and OUT positions cross (rotary spring released) position out the word NO and add the The maximum number of lateral designation amp on the line contacts that can be provided to between the words IN and open with the lateral spring OUT action is four

If the handle is to be mainshytained in both the IN and OUT First select the proper action positions cross out Spring Reshy (Pull or Push) and write in the turn To INOUT If the handle position in which this actinn is is to spring return to either the to take place then write in the IN or OUT position cross out contact number with the desired

the undesired pos1t1on and contact action Refer to Fig Maintaining IN amp OUT 186C for the lateral action

When rotary action is spring available Refer to Fig 187 return you can only have lateral for examples

65

- - --

--------

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

_ 01-

All OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

_______ LATERAL ACTION 1

OUT

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

2 3

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) UA ~~ Ao~

PULL I~ I IN POS 2 i9 6~96~ 68H~~6~ TO OPEN CONTACTS -2 (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

I-_ CONTACTS

~ HANDLE ENO

bull ltgti J-oltgtil-lti rt-bull deg 1-ltgtltgti

~f-oltgtif-8 7ltgti ~ f

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW I

4 3 2 I I I I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

X

X

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

I-_ CONTACT HANOLE ENO

bull 1ltgtil-ltgtltgtil~ r+ -n-ii-2 ii-

i I-

ii-

ii-

11- 11-

11f-oo-i~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

LATERAL ACTION

NO ROTATION WHEN I ~ I OUT MAINTAINING l IN amp OUTJ

~ n - - middot- - - -PULL l~I IN POS z TO CLOSE CONTACTS 1-yen S-6 TO OPEN CONTACTS -2-

(CROSS OUT THE NOT AFP1Y)

I- CONTACTS HANDLE END

bull o-11-oltgt1t-l r+ bull o-11-oo-1~ ~

5ltgt-il-ltgt-H-6 ~ 8 2

I 1--o-l o

l~ltgtil--o-lI 9 )Q

~H-o-ll 1J ~

8

-Iii-ltgt-12 I 2 --~

~1--o-l

i-o--1~

5

~~~

4 6 7 8 9

ID II Ilt

ACTION WHICH DOES

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

7 6 5 4 3 I 2 I I I I - LAlaquoRAL STAGES SEE

~

-46 Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

5

LAURAL ACTION

(CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH NOT tiPPL Y)

I-

CONTACTS POSITIONS-HANDLE NORMALLY 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 I 5 Ibull 3 2 I 1HANDLE ENO

bull ltgtif-oltgti~ SEE BELOW-ei1-oo-t~

~

X ~ ~ ~

8 ~~x - ~ -X9 X

Ilt ~~

Fill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10 8 7 6

________ LATERAL ACTION

POSITIONS (BACK VIEW l

3 2 I FOR LATERAL STAGES SEE

DESCRIPTION BELOW

~

= ~ --

n1 ~(I PTION

-IX

~

DCI nw

~

--~

DOES

middotmiddot~--

~- ~--

(CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES (CROSS OUT NOT APPLY)

THE ACTION WHICH DOES

66 Fig 187 Specification form indicating lateral action (SB-10 switches only)

---

-----

-----------------

------

--

-- -------

-----------------

--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd) ~-----~~~~--~~~~--------------- --

GENERAL 1JI ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-I 9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ute GED-3934 Part 2 for special features Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information I ON S~- 10 SWI lCHES CONTACT ARRANGEHENT

HA~K LAT STAUS lIARK X FOR CLOSED COtlACT WITH A DOT I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl(W)

HANDLE U0I 1- I3 ~

~Li~~~

-

I

I

HIRK 11lllOLE POSITIOtJS U~ONT VliW) Fig 188 Example of completed specification form calling for a 3-stage SB-1 switch 3-position maintained action pistol grip handle standard cover and panel thickness of 18 inch

~

f-~1-0GJIC -l=Pif-O()jl-0 5

middot~middot-i --f ~~~~~~N~LIIH 1-1oroR SWITCH1f H gtO bullos ESCUTCHEOIJ[NGRAVING

fH II

Tr~ 13 Oft1- 23H 1c I

I)

if 1f 20

3_ - -

i231f 1 f

[i- f ~~ ~~i1 c H ) 2lli H

~I )0iil-1~ 29

)1~ir )I

OOTIOMTOP BOTTOM Ol~Hllllll L0(11 IOll

ltOllllllt llCTIOII STWIII COID (NEMA IJ (8j I ~lPQSITIOIIS igi

QStANOARD SPRlllC RlTUR1A(JION OR PourlO

~-Ii fRO~~- CW PO oVAL bull DTARGET FP011 Pos_D 10_bull rROM PCS O roO PISTOL GRIP ~ -------

LEVpoundR bull ~~~~ r~NDlt bull - ---- _C00_ - - -- REIDVINPOS_ PULL 10 LOCK IN POS-----0 bull -------

NONpound

iu OtlT IUOW fOI 58-IG SPECIAL --

bull bull r------------~IL PISTOL GRIP o _____ c----~=~-1

NOUpound IPANHTHICKN(Ss~0 SP((IAL REMARKS ______________SPRIIIG RETURN TO

PULL PUStl INPOS TO CLOS[ CONTACTS TOOPpoundNCONTACTS

(CROSS OUT TH[ ACT I ON HI CH DOES flOT iPPLY)

(SPECIAL HATUR( FORM GED-)93~ PT2 HAY 8pound USED WITH THIS fORM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CObull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES Ubulle GED-3934 Part 2 for Ipeclal featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 and GET-6169 lor descriptive information

MARK HAIJQL[ POSITIONS (rRONT VI[)Oil sa-10 SIITCHES COHTACT ARRANGEMENT tlARKLAT STAGES MARKXfORCLOSpound0CONTACT IIITtlt- A DOT ()

I CONTACTS HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VI[) HAlDlE END ODD EVEN

bull 3 I5 4 ~~fC()jf ~middot1-0GJ i-0 ) -- s= __ l)j f-O()j 0

- = ~ )01 f46j f

~~~~~~N~LAHI PvHP sw1 reI l)jltll)jlltI PCS ES(Ul(H[Oll [GRAVING- ~deg1 fDO-lf--D H- ~ P1P II

~

PtMP -~i-001 i-0 ~

PMP 3~-~~t 3 PtMP 4-I c -I PtMP[5H Tomiddot

if if 21

2)i f ~---~ -~~ -H ir -

H H 2

)0 )I

-Iflit

001TOHTDPBOT10M lLRtllUAL LDCATIO

ltOUTIIIC ampCTIIPI siiiiiiiicaru (NEMAl]~I~LPOSITIQIIS 0

SPRIIJGRllURJACTIOH ~-RfROll~~ClPDS

HtOt1POS [Zj To~[fROH POS ~ TD[3j PISTOL GRIP

11A~l~ __0_ __C00 _ _ _ _ _ LEV(R

PULL TO LOCK IN POS-----0

GENERAL$ ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 9 AND -10 SWITCHES UIe GED-3934 Part 2 tor special featurebull Reier to GEA-4746 snd GET-8169 for debullcrlptlve inlormatton

ONSb-lOS(llCHES COUTAC1 A~RANGEtl(NT MARK LAT HAGES MARK X roP ~LOSpoundD CONTACT IIITHAOOT ()

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACKVl[W) HAN0l[ END OD0poundVEN

j CONTACTS

z I pj i-001 fC

( 7 I~ l-3 -IX

I f-O()j fo l ~ -5 ~ fO()j fO -)

-= p ~deg l-0 middot~=

~~~~~~~N~LAHMoPE SpoundLECroR pJI-OOlfl i ESCUlCHEONOIGRAVING - H H II

i

]H H 3 3

-If 1f 4~ [

51 ~ 1~

IDH H 7 7 H H 2 Ir 1if H 2

27H 1c 2

1c 1c 79 )C

r )1

00TTOMTOP BOTTOM TERIIUAL tO(AIIOTI

~ IIIMIIUS naw COID (NEMA 1i ~ I 11AIIITAlIEO ALL POSITIOllS ~

KIUIILED SPRlilG RI TURJ ACT I0~

~-RfROll~~CIIPOS OVAL

FROU Pas_bull To bull rRO~ bull TobullPOS PISTOL GRIP

MAIIT POS [II[] LEVER

PU~L TO LOCK IN PO$ ____ [] ROUND

bull NON[ fill OUT lllOW fOII Sl-10 SPECIAL __

~---------~IL PISTOL GRIP bull -----ir-----=~- NOrlE 0 jPANELlHtCKNESs~

SPECIAL REMARKS ______________

(SPECIAL FEHJRE FORM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORt1)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POW~R SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

Fig 190 Example of completed specification form calling for a 5-stage 8-position SB-1 switch with maintained action knurled handle and 1 4 inch panel thickness

SP[CIAL REMARKS ______________

Fig 189 Example of completed specification form calling for an 8-stage SB-1 switch 5-position spring return action

(CROSS OUT HI( A[TIQNIHICHD0poundS tlOT IIPPLY) (both directions) oval handle standard cover and panel

(SPECIAL HATURE f0RM GED-393~ PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FOAM)

GENERAL ELECTRIC CO bull POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPTbull PHILADELPHIA PA 19142 thickness of 18 inch

67

I

Ordering Guide for SB-1 -9 and -10 Switches (Contd)

SPECIFYING OPTIONAL FEATURES (GED-3934 Part 2)

Certain optional features are available with the SB-1 -9 and -10 switches but not necessarily to all of them Determine whether the option you require is available with the type of switch _you are specifying and check the appropriate block as described belGw

LOCK-IN HANDLE Specify the position or

pos1t1ons in which the handle is to lock All locks will be furnished with two keys unless otherwise specified

SEPARATELY MOUNTED LOCK

SB switches are available with a standard lock and key or with a Kirk key-interlock system Two keys are furnished with each lock Check the proper block If Kirk key interlock is checked fill out the co-ordinashytion information Be sure the panel thickness is given The switch is furnished with the lock for mounting above the switch as shown under standard mountshyings and identified as Lock No

1 Complete the description Lock No 1 locks and key is removable in Pos ___ If mounting the lock above the switch is not feasible or when two locks (each locking in a different position) are requirec the locks can be mounted to the right to the left or below the switch

To identify the location the locks are numbers 2 3 and 4 under Special Mounting Fill in the lock number in the description below and the position in which each lock is to lock

Coordination Information Reshyquired for Kirk Interlock Scheme

To ensure a designated key change is furnished only to the customer and equipment assigned the following inforshymation is required

1 Ultimate customers name and address Also the substation or building when required

2 Purchase order of coshyordinating locks already placed If we are the first to place the

GENERAL~ ELECTRIC

regSPICIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES use with GED-3934 Part 1 Refer lo GEA-4746 and GET-6169 for descriptive information

(~II-I Ofl Q) (ii)SA-1 9 OA 10)

LOCK IN HANIXE amprANDEM SWITCH D UNOLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITIOM _ _ _ _ VERTICALLY MOUN TEO DSPECI Al ___ __________________ _

HORIZOWULLY MOUNTED D

reg ~l~-~RA~E 0

(y 1

~NTED LCCK D STANDARD LdCK AND KEY D Kl RK K~Y INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( anow) MUST BE CONPLpoundT[O lftEN KIRK LOCK IS CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS _ middot-

STD tolJNTI NG SPECIAL toUNTING 110 2 110 3(lN01 liJ[ij]copy

copy11raquo~

LOCK NO__ LOCKS AND K[Y REMOVABLE Ill POS __ _

lOCk 110 __ -middot LOCKS ANO KEY REMOVABLE Ill POS _

COORDI-NATION 1NFOi1AfliiN ilElj)IRED FOR KIRK INTERl00lt SCHEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS __ _

2- PURCHilSE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS

CHECK PROPER 8l0CK 1110 C0MPl[T[ REQUIRED

llllk TANDEM (MO 7So THROW EITHER

SIDE OF CENTER Pf)S) D GEAR THOEN D

ADD IIAIIOLE TO DESI RED SWITCH AND SW NO SW 110 TO CORRESPOND WI TH SW 110 ON SPECIFICATION FORMf-J (CltraquoITACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICtl IS NOT REQUIRED- FOR AOOITIDIUL $WITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING TIIE PROPER SWITCH ARRAIIGpoundNOIT

(SR- I OR lt1)

PULL TO 11JRN bull TURK IN PO$ __ WHEN Ill

PULL IN PO$ __ ___ TO TlJRII TO PO$ ___ _

SR-I tI OH JOgt

PALLADILl-1 CONTACTS 0

IIHOIIUTIOII WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY POWER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT BUSINESS DEPT

PHILADELPHIA PA 19142

GENERALfli ELECTRIC

IFig 191 Specification form optional features

order so state and we will so advise on the purchase order that we will place for the locks

3 The drawings of any Kirk scheme already submitted or a copy of the drawing If the key change has a I ready been assigned as on reorders specify the key change number

Be sure this information is complete and correct when placing the order

TANDEM SWITCHES When a switch with more

than 16 stages is required two or more switches can be assembled in tandem operating with one handle The switches are normally mounted horizontally but can also be furnished vertically mounted A link mechanism is normally furnished when the throw on either side of the center position does not exceed 75 degrees A gear me chanism is used when the throw exceeds 75 degrees Show the location of the switches and handle on the sketch provided for up to four switches in tandem The middotcorresponding

switch numbers on the sketch should also be on the contactshyarrangement specification form Draw in the handle to show its location or specify the switch number on which the handle will be mounted When more than four switches or a different arrangement is required use a separate sheet showing the proper switch arrangement

PULL-TO-TURN

If the handle is to turn in the IN position indicate what positions or positions if it is not -to turn in the IN position write none Fill in the position the handle will be pulled in and state to what position or positions you will be turning to

PALLADIUM CONTACTS Check this block if required

Palladium contacts are available for temperature-meter switches ( see Temperature-meter Switches) If for a special applishycation where some of the conshytacts are palladium but not all specify requirement in this block or on the contact arrangement

i-

I

68

------

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - -- -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

GENERAL ELECTRIC

SPECIFICATION FORM TYPE SBM SWITCHES Refer to GET-6169D for descriptive information

(6-8) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (19 25)

I I 10141 I I I IlsrA~ESjsJJPNLJHKlsGJs1sHAPPosGlJR11 CATALOG NO6 FOR FACTORY USE ONLY------- 26 32 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 n

I KNURLED = K A STANDARD= S II HOVAL =VIBIA C TARGET = T MAINT PULL ~ PISTOL GRIP= P I C SR FROM I SR FROM y NONE = N 1 ESCUTCHEONPOS TO D LEVER = L ICCW I cwy ALL C (SPECIAL) = P III KEYWAYSWITH L ROUND = D POSITIONS POSITIONS I POSITIONS I0 I SPRREt

LOCK E NONE =NI t KEYED = R I N I $ I ~ (FOR REM HDL~ I

SPRING RETURN - -I

TO MATCH SB-I -MAINTAINED N I

SBM SWITCH OPERATING REQUIREMENT TABLE MARK INTERMEDIATE middotpoc

~ USE OJLY WHEN ~ I SUP CONTACTSI ~

(44--51) ARE REQUIREDI ~ STANDARD ESC TARGET ESCt3 FROM zPOSITIONSCONTACTS I45 2 C8 7 I(6-8) 6 5 4 2 4 2000 EVEN 3 u (9-16) 3III lol 5 2 I1 2042 4Of ~to 2217-24 (POS) 5 III(25-32) 3 3

3 4 6 Olfo ~IO

8 ___J_____4 4(33-40

(41-48) 5 5

6J IO ~~ 6 6(49-56 (57-64) 77

7 8 (6-8) ESCUTCHEONmiddot ENGRAVINGPOSOlfo OIIO 8 8 9-16(6-8) (65-72) I I l I I I IlUJQ(9-16) I9 9II 1016 9 10 1724 I I I I I I

OI r_~IO 25-32 I I T I I I -t-10 10 2(25-~

I I II 33---40 I I I I I I III bull 12 I41-48 T T I I I IOlfO OIIO 12 12(33-40) 3

(41-48) 149--56 I I I I I I I13 13 13 14 51-64 I I I I I I I Oj~-~fo 1414 4

(6-8) 65-72 I I I I I II(57-64) 15 9-1616 15 I I I I I I I15 LLlili 5OlfO OIIO 16 16(65-72)(6-8) 17-24 I I i I I I I

(9-16) 125-32 I I I I I II17I I 1017 17 18 17 6OI fo Ol lO 18 18 t33-40 I I I I I I I(17-24) 41-48 I I l I I I(25-32)

19 1919 20 7OjfO ojfo12c 19--56 I I I I I I I20 (33-401 57-64 I I I I I I I ~T~~ l I I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 l 2 I I J 16 Is 14 I I 3 I 2 I I l 8

TOP bullL STOP LOCATIONS I I STOP LOCATIONS I ~-72 I I I I I I I TERMINAL LOCATION (MAX 2 LINES 8 LETTERS PER LINE) (6-8) l9l CKT DESIGNATION ENGRAVING 22 LETTERS MAX C3ol

I1101 s11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (31)

f~~~- I I I I (80) ~ ( ) ---------1--------------------------~-------------c---r--=1I

9

~1 I I Imiddot I I I (80)

I I I I I I I I General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355

GED-3933B

69

-- --

--

l

I

GENERAL ELECTRlt SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 1 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

Use GED-3934 Part 2 for special features

ON SB-10 SWITCHES MARK LAT STAGES WI TH A DOT ( bull)

CONTACTS HANDLE END ODD EVEN

-H- - f--H- --1 ~

-n- --1 I-- f- - I--H- ~ f--

- ~ - f---1 I- 7 I---l f-- -H--4 f-- --1 f--

--11---lf--

--1 f-- --1 I---11- -H---l f-- --l 1-7 I- --1 I---1 f-- --1 f--

- f- --1 f-

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM TERMINAL LOCATION

ROTATING ACTION MAIIJTAlllED ALL POSITIOl~S

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT MARK X FOR CLOSED CONTACT

HANDLE POSITIONS (BACK VIEW)

~---------- - -SPRING RETURN ACTION

- bull S R FROM CCW POS I SR FROM CW POS

I

FROM POS bull TO bull i FROM POS bull Tobull

RANDLES

KNURLED

OVAL

PISTOL GRIP ~--------~--------

MAI NT POS LEVERI I I I i ~----------------PULL TO LOCK IN POS ROUNDbull

RADIAL

MARK HANDLE POSITIONS (FRONT VIEW)

CIRCUIT PLATE ENGRAVING -POS ESCUTCHEON ENGRAVING

ESCUTCHEON STAMtARD COVER (NEMA I) t8l II bull STANDARD

OR ROUND bullbull TARGET bullbull 1---------

KEYED FOR REMOV tiANDLE bullbull REMOV IN POS_

bull 1---------

bull NONE bull -SPECIALFill OUT BELOW FOR SB-10

L PISTOL GRIP bull LATERAL ACTION IPANEL TH ICKNESSNONE IbullIla ROTATION--WttEN I IN I OUT MAINTAINING (IN amp OUT) SPRI llG RETURN TO I IN I OUT SPEC IAL middotREMARKS PULL I PUSH I IN POS TO CLOSE CONTACTS TO OPEN CONTACTS I (CROSS OUT THE ACTION WHICH DOES NOT APPLY)

(SPECIAL FEATURE FORM GED-3934 PT2 MAY BE USED WITH THIS FORM)

General Electric Co Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 GED-3934B Part 1

I

70

GENERAL-) ELECTRIC SPECIFICATION FORM-PART 2 TYPE SB-1 -9 AND -10 SWITCHES

I

-

I

Use with GED-3934 Part 1

(SH-1 on CJ)

LCCK IN HANDLE bullHANDLE LOCKS AND KEY REMOVABLE IN POSITION ___ _

SPEC I AL ________________________ _

( SB-1 CJ OR 10

SEPARATELY MJUNTED LOCK bull STANDARD LOCK AND KEY bull KIRK KEY INTERLOCK 0 (COORDINATION INFO ( BELOW) MUST BE

COMPLETED WHEN KIRK LOCK is CHECKED)

PANEL THICKNESS ____________ _

STD t-OUNTI NG SPECIAL t-OUNTING NO 2 NO 3(1) NO I

CD [ijJ copy

WNO~

LOCK NO_l _ LOCKS AND _KEY REMOVABLE IN POS __ _

LOCK NO ___ LOCKS ~ND KEY REMOVABLE IN POS ___ _

COORDINATION INFOR-~ATION RE(JJIREDFOR KIRK INTERLOCK S(IEME

I ULTIMATE CUSTOMERS NAME amp ADDRESS _________ _

2 PURCHASE ORDER OF COORDINATING LOCKS _____ _

3 COORDINATING INFO (KNOWN KEY NO amp PRINT)___ _

( SB- l 9 OR 10 )

TANDEM SWITCH bull VERTICALLY MOUIHED bull HOR I ZONTALLY MOUNTED bull LINK TANDEM (MAX 75deg THROW El THER

SIDE OF CENTER POS) bull GEAR TANDEM bull

I0 0 ()

I 0 I

ADD HANDLE TO DESlRED SWITCH AND SW NO SW NO TO CORRESPOND WITH SW NO ON SPECIFICATION FORMl-l_ (CONTACT ARRG 1MT FORM) CROSS OUT THE SWITCH WHICH IS NOT RfQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCHES USE A SEPARATE SHEET SHOWING THE PROPER SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

(SB-1 OR 9)

PULL TO TURN bull TURN IN POS------ _____ WHEN IN

PULL IN Pos _________ TO TURN TO POS __ --

( SB- 1 9 OR 10)

PALLADIUM CONTACTS bull CHECK PROPER BLOCK AND COMPLETE REQUIRED INFORMATION WRITE NONE WHERE APPLICABLE

GE Meter and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway

Malvern Pa 19355

GED-3934B Part 2 71

Field Modification Instructions for the Type SBM Control Switch

CASE I-INSPECTING SWITCH ONLY When the SBM switch is taken apart

for inspection purposes only and is to be reassembled without modifications follow this sequence

1 Turn handle to vertical ( 12 oclock position)

2 Remove handle and mounting screws

3 Remove screws holding the front plate of positioning chamber

4 Remove adjustable stops noting relation of the punch mark on the operating shaft This punch mark should be pointing towards the 90deg ccw position (9 oclock locashytion)

5 Remove the stop spacers and posishytioning wheel The balance of the parts in the front part of the chamber should be left intact

6 Use a 516 wrench to loosen the tie bolts in the rear of the switch Back off the bolts only as far as necessary to loosen the posishytioning chamber from the balance of the assembly and remove chamshyber

7 Push tie bolts back up against the rear barrier to keep the stages intact

8 Turn operating shaft so that punch mark is not facing the bottom vertical (6 oclock) posishytion

9 Remove the first stage front barshyrier cover

10 Read the following before reshymoving cams

Note Each stage houses two double-surface cams The first controls the action of the even number contact while the second cam controls the odd number contact One cam is distinguished from another by a number (1 to 22) on one surface of the cam

On a control switch with a spring reshyturn feature there are no parts in the front half of the positioning chamber except the stop cams and a thick spacer The rear half of this chamber houses the torsion spring When the chamber is removed from the asshysembly the spring actuator torsion spring

With this number the following letters appear in 45deg intervals 8-C-D-E-F-G-H On the reverse side of the cam there are eight letters in 45deg intervals as folshylows J-K-L-M-N-P-R-S

11 Note the number of the cams as they are removed jotting down the letter on the cam which passes over the punch mark on the opershyating shaft The cam must be reassembled on the operating shaft with respect to this letter and punch mark in order to obtain the same contact sequence

12 The balance of parts in any stage may be removed in any sequence

13 Unless the operating shaft is to be changed there is no need to reshymove the tie bolts when following any of the above steps These bolts should be kept snug against the rear barrier to insure proper reassembly of the switch

14 When reassembling follow all steps in reverse order

CASE II-CHANGING CONTACT SEQUENCE

If the SBM switch is to be taken apart and the contact sequence modishyfied follow the steps outlined in Case I Omit step 11 since the cam locashytions in most cases will have to be changed to obtain the necessary seshyquence The following are instructions necessary to select the new cams

SET UP THE FOLLOWING TABLE

IBM CODE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 CAM

POSITIONS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CODE

CONTACT 1 xx xx X X 273 2 xx 060 3 X X xx 305

X 1 0 0 4

The first line indicates the SBM coding system The second line corshyresponds to the eight handle positions of the switch with position 1 at the 9

switch Referring to the segment on the right contact 1 is shown closed in position 1 Directly above position 1 is the IBM Code 2 Place this number in the extreme left column of the section marked Cam Code In the next segment contact 1 is closed in positions 3 4 5 directly above these positions are the code number 1 2 and 4 Their sum is the second digit of the e cam code In the third segment conshytact 1 is closed in positions 7 amp 8 the code numbers above these two positions are 1 amp 2 Their sum is the third digit of the code number It can be seen that contact 2 is only closed in the second segment under positions 3 amp 4 whose code is 2 amp 4 There is no contact sequence in segments one and three so the first and last digit of the contacts code number will be zero The middle digit will be 6 the sum of codes 2 amp 4 The same method is used to find the cam code for contact 3 amp 4

tiNow that the cam codes have been derived refer to the attached cam code sheets One of these sheets is for the left-hand even number contacts and the other for the right-hand odd number contacts

The cam code for contact 3 is 305 Refer to the Cam Code sheet for odd number contacts Beside number 305 on cam and position is the listing 14G This means cam 14 should be placed on the switch operating shaft so that the letter G passes over the punch mark This will provide the sequence for contact 3 as shown in the diagram

For contact 4 the cam code is 100 Beside th is number on the sheet for left-hand even number contacts is -the listing 18 Cam 1 should be placed on the operating shaft so that the letter B passes over the punch mark on the shaft This will provide the sequence for contact 4 as shown in the diagram The same procedure should be followed for contacts 1 and 2 whose codes are 273 and 060 and whose listings are 5F and 2C

The switch can be now be reasshyand spacer will be up against the front barshy oclock location and the balance of the sembled by reversing the steps listed in rier plate of the first stage of contacts positions in 45deg intervals moving in a Case I Care must be exercised to make These parts should be removed and replaced

clockwise rotati9n The contact diashy sure that the punch mark is returnedin order The balance of the steps for disshymantling and reassembly remain the same gram shown above indicates a seshy to 9 oclock position before placing

quence for a two-stage four-contact the stop cams This automatically

I

72

I 2

places the handles in the 12 oclock tact sequence When a slip cam is code sheets Requests for changes of position and insures a correct sequence required to actuate a sequence as this type shou Id be referred back to for the contacts contact 1 or 2 in the table below the factory

22K is the cam code When the seshyquence is to be as shown for contactSLIP CAMS 3 FROM WHEN USED 43 the cam code is 220

4 2 1 quence is the slip cam for breaker before-break (overlapping) sequence 1

One cam not covered by this seshy Switches which require a makeshy

X X 22K control switches require special cams only when three

2 XX X 22KThis cam is number 22 and can intermediate steps are required beshyX X 220

shaft in two locations for proper con- not be modified therefore by using the only be mounted on the operating tween each handle position They canshy 3

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE ODD NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp

Contact CamConlact Cam Contact Cam Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp

Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Position

240 3L140 2L 200 lJ 300 2K 340 6L 001 1 S

040 1l 100 1K000 241 lOJ 341 13H

002 1 R 141 7L 201 2J 301 6K041 4L 101 3K 142 SL 202 3J 242 1ll 302 7K 342 14H

003 2S 042 5L 102 4K

243 21 H 343 6H043 9S 143 15H 203 6J 303 13G103 lOS 244 12L204 304 BK 344 15L 005 3S

144 9L044 4P 104 5K004 1p 245 16F 345 7H

006 2R 145 20E 205 7J 305 14G045 12S 105 11K

246 17f 346 8H 007 6S

146 18E 206 l0R 306 15G046 SR 106 9R 247 10H 347 2H147 9H 207 13F 307 6G047 15S 107 21G

150 lOL 210 5J 250 11N 310 9K 350 218 011 4S 010 IN 050 3N 110 4N

111 12K 151 16H 211 SJ 251 17H051 12N 311 15K 351 108 012 311 252 19F052 11 R 152 178 212 llJ 312 20D 352 11H 013 7S

112 12R 253 11 F053 208 113 16E 153 12H 213 14F 313 7G 353 3H

014 2P 254 20H154 15C 354 9C 015 10P

054 7P 114 8P 214 9P 314 18H 155 12C 215 15F 255 12F 315 8G 355 4H

016 6R 055 16C 115 17E

156 8D 216 21 F 256 11D 316 9G 356 SH 017 13E

056 14D 116 15R 257 JF157 4E 217 6f 317 2G 357 1H057 7E 117 10G

120 3M 160 6M 220 4M 260 7M 320 10K 360 13A 021 5M 020 lM 060 2M

161 14A 221 9J 261 15A 321 21A 361 6A 022 4R

061 8M 121 11M 362 middot 7A

023 es 162 15M 262 20F 322 16G062 9M 122 12M 222 12J 163 8A 223 15J 263 9A 323 10A 363 2A

024 3P 063 18F 123 17G

124 11 p 164 21C 224 12P 264 16A 324 17A 364 lOC 025 llS

064 10M 125 19E 165 11A 225 20C 265 12A 325 11G 365 3A

026 7R 065 17C

166 90 266 12D066 15D 126 20A 226 16D 326 12G 366 4A 027 14E 167 5E 267 4f 367 IA227 7F 327 JG067 SE 127 11 E

170 1J8 270 148 370 68 031 9N

070 6N 130 7N 230 8N 330 158030 2N 171 78 271 88 371 28

032 ION 131 20G 231 18G 331 98071 15N

172 100 272 118 372 38 033 15E

072 21D 132 168 232 17D 332 128 173 48133 12E 233 SF 273 5f 373 18

034 6P 073 9E 333 4G

174 6C 274 7C 334 8C 374 2C 035 21 E

074 13C 134 14C 234 15P 175 3C 275 4C 335 5G 375 IC

036 13D 075 lOE 135 11 C 235 9f

176 2D 276 3D 376 1D 037 6E

076 6D 136 7D 236 lOF 336 4D 177 1E 277 1f 377077 2E 137 3E 237 2F 337 lG

NOTE When cam code specifies the 11e of cam 1A 2A 3A etc th number on the cam 1hould pan over the punch mark on the operation shaft since the letter A does not appear on the cams

SBM SWITCH CAM CODE EVEN NUMBER CONTACTS)

Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact CamContact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam Contact Cam rContact Cam Sequence amp

Number Position Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence amp Sequence ampSequence

Number PDsition Number Position Number Position Number PositionNumber Position Number Posilton Number Position

340 6A040 IC 100 18 140 28 240 3A 300 2A000 200 lA 341 13H

002 1G 141 108 241 7H 301 6H001 lH 041 4H 101 3H 201 2H

242 11G 342 21A 003 2G

042 SC 102 4G 142 91 302 10A202 3G 243 14G 343 61(

004 1 F 103 7G 143 15K 303 13G043 8G 203 6G 104 5B 144 BB 244 12A 344 UA

005 Jf 044 4C 204 304 9A 045 12F 105 11 f 145 17H 245 16f 305 21H 34 lOJ

006 2F 205 ION

146 18C 346 9J046 9f 106 SF 206 7f 246 20C 306 15J 147 SJ 347 2J047 15F 107 14F 207 13f 247 7J 307 6J007 6f

150 78010 1 050 JC 110 48 210 5A 250 11A 310 8A 350 14A 011 4 111 12H 151 16H 211 9H 251 20 351 7L 012 3

051 12C 311 15H 152 20G052 llC 112 12 212 11 252 19A 312 17G 352 11M

013 IOG 053 17E 113 16E 153 12K 213 21G 253 11K 313 105 353 3K 014 2 114 9E 154 15N 254 17C 314 188 354 8M 015 7

054 10 214 8 055 16C 115 208 155 12N 215 15S 255 125 315 95 355 4L

016 6 056 21 E 156 9N 356 55 017 13E

116 lSE 216 14 256 115 316 85 057 10P 117 7S 157 4S 217 6S 257 3S 317 2S 357 15

020 1D 060 2C 120 38 160 68 220 4A 260 lOC 320 7A 360 13A 021 5D 121 11H 161 218 261 15L061 9C 221 8H 321 14H 361 6l 022 4D 062 SC 122 12B 162 158 262 17A 322 16G 362 10K 023 9G

222 12G 163 9K 263 8K063 18D 123 20D 223 15G 323 7K 363 2K

024 3D 064 7C 124 118 164 148 224 12D 264 16A 324 20F 364 7M 025 11D 065 20H 125 19B 165 11N 265 12L 325 1ll225 17F 365 3L 026 lOF 066 15P 126 17D 166 8N 226 16D 266 12P 326 125 366 4M 027 21 f 127067 9P 167 5N 267 4JllJ 227 lOR 327 3J 367 lJ

030 2D 070 6C 130 10D 170 138 270 21C230 9D 330 15M 370 6M 031 8D 071 15C 131 178 171 lOL 231 18A 271 9l 331 8L 371 2L 032 7D 072 14C 132 168 172 7N 272 11 P232 20A 332 12M 372 3M 033 15R 073 BP 133 12R 173 4N 233 9R 273 SP 333 4K 373 lK 034 6D 074 13C 134 21D 174 6N 234 15D 274 lOM 334 9M 374 2M 035 14D 075 7P 135 11 R 175 3N 235 SR 275 4P 335 SR 375 1L 036 13D 076 6P 136 ION 176 2N 236 7R 276 3P 336 4R 376 IM 037 6R 077 2P 137 JR 177 1N 277 1p237 2R 337 1R 377

NOTE Whbulln cam code specifibullbull the use of cam 1A 2A 3A etc the number on the cam should pon over the punch mork on the operattOn shaft since the letter A does not oppeor on the cams

73

I THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY

USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

SBM Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

SBM SWITCH NOMENCLATURE EXPLANATION

16SBM A 3 s 1A 2 p 1 No of No of Seq 1st Stop Panel Escutcheon Stages Positions No Escutcheon Action Position Thickness Keyways

A= 1 2 = 2 F A S = STANDARD s K = KNURLED 1 = 0 - 14 FACTORY ASSIGNED B = 2 3 = 3 A S T = TARGET E V = OVAL 2 = 115 (Used with C = 3 4 = 4 C S P = TARGET E P = PISTOL GRIP Escutcheon R only) 0=4 5 = 5 T I (PULL TO LOCK) L = LEVER E = 5 6 = 6 0 G N = NONE B A = SB1 KNURLED F = 6 7 = 7 R N R = REMOVABLE E B = SB1 OVAL G = 7 8 = 8 y E HANDLE L C = SB1 PISTOL GRIP H = 8 D 0 D = SB1 ROUND K=9 w N = NONE L = 10

+ 3

1 5

6 7

POSITION DIAGRAM FRONT VIEW

DESCRIPTION OF ACTION

MAINTAINED BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - CCW ONLY 1A Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 W - From position 2 2A - Positions 1 3 5 7 2W - From position 1 3A - Positions 2 4 6 8 3W - From position 1 (feel position 2)

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM BOTH DIRECTIONS SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CCW

1 S - Positions 2 4 1 H - From position 4 maintain position 1 2 2S - Positions 1 5 2H - From position 4 maintain position 1 3S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 2) 3H - From position 5 maintain position 2 4S - Positions 1 5 (feel position 4) 4H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 2 5S - Positions 1 5 (feel positions 2 amp 4) 5H - From position 5 maintain position 1 1 F - Pull to lock in position 1 (feel position 2) 6H - From position 5 (feel pos 4) maintain pos 1 2F - Pull to lock in position 2

SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 - FROM CW ONLY SPRING RETURN TO POSITION 3 FROM CCW MAINTAIN POSITION AT CW

1 C - From position 4 1 K - From position 2 maintain position 4 5 2C - From position 5 2K - From position 2 maintain position 5 3C - From position 5 (feel position 4) 3K - From position 1 maintain position 4

4K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 4 5K - From position 1 maintain position 5 6K - From position 1 (feel pos 2) maintain pos 5

74

THE GUIDE BELOW IS FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES WHICH ARE NUMBERED AT THE FACTORY USE IT ONLY AS A GUIDE TO IDENTIFY CATALOG NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY THE FACTORY

DO NOT USE IT TO MAKE UP CATALOG NUMBERS

16S81 or 9 Nomenclature Guide to Unlisted Switches

16SB1 or

16SB9 Design

Type

Common

To All SB-1 amp9

Switches

SPECIFIED ONLY WHERE SPECIAL FEATURES

BASIC SWITCH CODE LETTERS ARE REQUIRED

I

16S81 A B 3 __ S s M

2nd Code

2nd Basic 3 or 4 Digit No Letter

1st Basic Letter Cont Develop- Style

Letter- Type of ment 1st Code Escutcheon

No of Stationary Factory Assign Letter Specify

Stages Contacts No of Pos Enclosure Engraving

A=A=l AampE- 100 = 9 10 11 B = 2 All Fixed amp 12Pos Explosion

C = 3 Contacts 200 = 2 Pos Proof bull

0=4 Thus 300 W= E = 5 0-- f--0-1 l--0 amp 3 Pos Watertight bull

F = 6 B K amp F- 900 amp Dusttight

I G=7 All Fixed 400 = 4 Pos P=

H = 8 Contacts 500 = 5 Pos Oil-Filledbull

K=9 Thus 600 = 6 Pos S=

L = 10 0-- l--0 0-- l--0 700 = 7 Pos Standard

M = 11 CampG- 800 = 8 Pos Cover

N = 12 All Fixed OAOO = Special L=

P = 13 Contacts Large

R = 14 Thus Cover

T = 15 o--1 H l--0 M= U = 16 D H amp M - Fabricated

Misc Combina- Metal bull

tions of A B C ( Large)

E F amp G anc1 D-Slotted

Single Contacts End Cover bull

Example V1 = Vert

0-f l--0-1 l--0 Split (Std)bull

0--l 1--1 l--0 V2 = Vert

0--l f-00 f--0 Split ( Lg) bull

0--l t--0-l H1 = Horiz

r-0--l r-0 Split (Std)bull

H2 = Horiz

Split (Lg) bull

I

2 p

3rd Code

Letter

Spring Ret 1st Code 4th Code

or Number Letter

Maint Panel Styi Contacts Thickness Handle

2 = 18 D = Round

3=316 V-604 7044-1 4 = 14 K = Knurled Etc K-6079120-1 Numbers L = Large Indicate Pistol Grip Number of K-6208137-1 One- P = Small

Sixteenths Pistol Grip

of an Inch K-6046074-1 99 = No R = Radial

Panel V-6047043-1

Thickness V = Oval

Involved K-6046075-1

Y = Omit Handle E = Lever

V-6248034-1

W = Watertightbull

M-6411 824Gmiddot 2 ( 1 8)

M-6411824G-3 ( 1 4)

C = Locked Handle

5th Code

Letter

S1 SequenceS2

Latchbull bull S3

Rightbullbull bullA2 AngleAllA3 Drive

A4 R1 = Ratchet Mech for

CW Rot Only bull

R2 = Ratchet

Mech for

CCW Rot Onlyt P1-P12 =

Pull-to-Lock

H 1 to H 16t

bull Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to bull bullSuffix added by factory engineers to complete switch bull This feature is no longer identify a special contact arrangement to customiddotmermiddots specifications available (obsolete)

i Sl = Latching in CW amp CCW positions l A A 1 = Switch mounted to the left tPalladium contacts are available S2 = Will prevent repeated CCW throw A2 = Switch mounted to the right H 1 designates a single-stage switch S3 = Will prevent repeated CW throw A3 = Switch mounted up H2 a two-stage up to H 16 for a

16-stage switchA4 = Switch mounted down

75

I

SB-9SB-1 or SB-9 SB-1 2nd Form Letter 3rd Form LeHer 3rd Form Leiter

ESCUTCHEON

Escutcheon Typical Model ThrowCode Number Handle No

Handle Removable in Vertical Position

6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135deg cwA -3 CC18 360degA

CC2 135deg CW-48 -4 CC19 360deg

C

8

CC3 135deg cw-5 -5 CC15 360degC

CC4 135deg cw-6D CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW-6D CC22 45deg CCW-6D

-6 CC27 360deg

E

D

CC5 45deg CW-7 CC12 75deg cw-7E CC13 45deg cw amp ccw-7E

-7 CC20 360degE CC25 75deg CCW

F

-7E

CC6 45deg CW-8 CC14 45deg CW amp CCW-8F

-8 CC24 360deg

G

F

CC7 45deg CW I Eng -9 CC8 45deg CCW R Eng-9G CC17 45deg CCW-9G CC26 135deg CCW-9G CC29 45deg CW-9G

-9 CC21 360deg

H

G

-10 CC23 360deg CC9 45deg CW I Eng-10H CC10 45deg CCW R Eng -10H CC31 45deg CWH -10 CC32 45deg CCW-10H

c18 360degJ -23

y -24 CC19 360deg

z ~ ~ -25 CC21 360deg

Handle Removable-90deg CCW

K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135deg CW -11 CC18 360degK

~middot~ -12 CC2 135degCWL L CC19 360deg

M

- 1 2

-13 CC3 135deg CW M -13 CC15 360deg

-14N CCl 1 45deg CW amp CCW N -14 CC27 360deg N -14 CC4 135deg cw

1N -14 CC22 45deg ccw

Fixed Handle

p 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) 6016164-15 RaundR 6016164-1 Standards

T 6402670G Target Omit Escutcheonu

V Special Escutcheon

Removable Handle

w Omit Escutcheon Special Escutcheon(00)

Code

A

8

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

L

M

p

R

s

T

u

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

Description

Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact

SR from 45deg CW to Normal

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

SR from 45deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal (One Extra ~toge) 6

SR from 90deg CW to Normal

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal

SR from 90deg CW to Normal (One Extra Stage) 6

SR from 90deg CCW to Normal 6(One Extra Stage)

SR from 45deg CW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal 6 (Two Extra Stages)

Maintaining Contacts

Pull To Lock

SR from 45deg CW amp CCW to Normal Pull ta Lack in 45deg CCW Then Turn ta 75deg CCW amp Pull to Lock

SR all Positions Except When Locked Pull ta Lock at 75deg CCW

Spring Return Only

SR from all Positions to Normal

SR from all Positions to NormalD (One Extra Stage)

SR from all Positions to Normalfil (Two Extra Stages)

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return cw =Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise

Symbols

D = One Extra Stage for Torsion Spring

6 =Two Extra Stages for Additional Torsion Springs

Code

A

8

C

D

J

M

N

K

V

L

E

F

X

s

T

u

w

y

z

Description

Maintaining Except

SR from 45deg CW to Normol

SR from 45deg CCW to Normal

Some as A-See bull

Some as 8-See bull

SR from 75deg CW to 45deg CW amp from 75deg

CCW to 45deg CCW

Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Maintaining

Maintaining Contact for al I 45deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for al I 30deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for 60deg Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 37 frac120 Positions

Maintaining Contact for all 75deg Positions

Maintaining Contact ior Two Positions 90deg Apart Arranged V

Maintaining Contact for Four Positions 90deg Apart Arranged +

Special

Spring Return

SR for all Combinations of 30deg 37 frac12 0 45deg

60 middot 7 5deg 90deg cw amp ccw

Same as S-See Has 1 Extra Stage for Extra Spring

Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half

Woy Point

SR-90deg CW amp CCW Temp Feel 30deg amp 60deg

SR from 90deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 60deg CW or CCW or both

SR from 75deg CW or CCW or both

Abbreviations

SR = Spring Return

cw =Clockwise

CCW = Counterclockwise

SPRING RETURN AND MAINTAINING

-

-

[Number to be assigned]

76

I

bull

e GE Meter and Control-----~-~~~--------------~---72~0~5QGEreat Valley Parkway

Malvern PA 19355

IP-792-SM

I